Download: Storage temperature NP-FM50 battery pack Table for difference of functions

MVC-CD200/CD300 SERVICE MANUAL US ModelCanadian Model Level 2 Ver 1.0 2001. 05 AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Tourist Model Korea Model Photo : MVC-CD300 Japanese Model This service manual contains information for japanese model as well. On the SY-67 board and the DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY (Including the MD-083 Board) This service manual provides the information on the premised of the circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the SY-67 board in case of trouble. It is also premised that the mechanism deck DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASS...
Author: Tucker Shared: 8/8/19
Downloads: 1044 Views: 4697

Content

MVC-CD200/CD300 SERVICE MANUAL US ModelCanadian Model Level 2 Ver 1.0 2001. 05 AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Tourist Model Korea Model

Photo : MVC-CD300 Japanese Model This service manual contains information for japanese model as well. On the SY-67 board and the DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY (Including the MD-083 Board) This service manual provides the information on the premised of the circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the SY-67 board in case of trouble. It is also premised that the mechanism deck DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY (including the MD-083 board) shall be exchanged as an assembly in case of trouble. Therefore, disassembling procedure and exploded view of the DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY are not shown. The block diagram, printed wiring board, schematic diagram and electrical parts list of the SY-67 board are also not shown. Note that the following pages are lacking intentionally. SY-67 board DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY Block diagram ... Page 3-15 to 3-20 Disassembly ... Page 2-15 to 2-16 Printed wiring board ... Page 4-19 to 4-22 Exploded view ... Page 6-8 Schematic diagram... Page 4-23 to 4-42 MD-083 board Electrical parts list ... Page 6-18 to 6-24 Block diagram ... Page 3-21 to 3-26 Printed wiring board ... Page 4-43 to 4-46 Schematic diagram ... Page 4-47 to 4-54 Electrical parts list ... Page 6-14 to 6-18 The above-described information is shown in service manual Level 3.

SPECIFICATIONS

System Exposure control Drive ACC jack General Image device Automatic exposure, Shutter Read: Maximum ×8 Mini-minijack (Ø 2.5 mm) Application MVC-CD200: 6.64 mm speed priority, Aperture Write: ×4 USB jack Sony battery pack NP-FM50 (1/2.7 type) color CCD priority, Manual exposure Readout mini-B (supplied) MVC-CD300: 8.93 mm White balance Noncontact optical readout LCD screen Power requirements(1/1.8 type) color CCD Automatic, Indoor, Outdoor, (using semiconductor laser) 7.2 V Lens One-push Laser LCD panel Power consumption 3× zoom lens Data system Wavelength: 777 to 787 nm TFT (Thin Film Transistor (During shooting with MVC-CD200: f = 6.1 – Movie: MPEG1 NA: 0.5 active matrix) drive the LCD backlight 18.3 mm (1/4 – 3/4 inches) Still: JPEG, GIF (in TEXT Maximum output: 23 mW LCD size turned on) (39 – 117 mm (1 9/16 – mode, Clip Motion), TIFF Emission duration: 600 ns 2.5 type MVC-CD200: 3.0W45/8 inches) when Audio with still image: Total number of dots MVC-CD300: 3.5 W converted into a 35 mm still MPEG1 (Monaural) Input and Output 123 200 (560×220) dots Operating temperature camera) Recording medium connector 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) MVC-CD300: f = 7 – 21 mm 8 cm CD-R/CD-RW A/V OUT (MONO) (9/32 – 27/32 inches) (34 – Recommended flash (Monaural) — Continued on next page — 102 mm (1 3/8 – recording distance (ISO Minijack Video: 4 1/8 inches) when is set to AUTO): 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced, converted into a 35 mm still MVC-CD200: 0.3 m to sync negative camera) 2.5 m (11 7/8 inches to Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ 8 1/3 feet) DIGITAL STILL CAMERAMVC-CD200: F = 2.8 – 2.9 load) MVC-CD300: F = 2.0 – 2.5 MVC-CD300: 0.3 m to Output impedance: 2.2 kΩ3m(11 7/8 inches to 9 feet 10 1/8 inches), Storage temperature NP-FM50 battery pack Table for difference of functions –20°C to +60°C (–4°F to Battery type +140°F) Lithium ion Model MVC-CD200 MVC-CD300 Dimensions (Approx.) Maximum output Lens Carl Zeiss lens ✕ a MVC-CD200: 143×92× voltage 89 mm (5 3/4×3 5/8× DC 8.4 V Optical zoom 3× 3 5/8 inches) (w/h/d) Mean output voltage Digital zoom 6× MVC-CD300: 143×92× DC 7.2 V 94 mm (5 3/4×3 5/8× Capacity Filter diameter 37mm 52mm 3 3/4 inches) (w/h/d) 8.5 Wh (1180 mAh) CCD imager Size 1/2.7 type 1/1.8 type Mass (Approx.) Operating temperature MVC-CD200: 610 g 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) Pixels 2.1mega 3.3mega (1 lb 6 oz) Dimensions (Approx.) Image size Still 1600×1200 2048×1536 MVC-CD300: 650 g 38.2×20.5×55.6 mm (1 lb 7 oz) (including NP- (1 9/16×13/16×2 1/4 inches) 1600 (3:2) 2048 (3:2) FM50 battery pack, disc and (w/h/d) lens cap, etc.) 1024×768 1600×1200Mass (Approx.) Built-in microphone 76 g (3 oz) 640×480 1280×960 Electret condenser microphone Accessories 640×480 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C Built-in speaker Movie 320 (HQ) Dynamic speaker AC power adaptor (1) Power cord (mains lead) (1) 320×240 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C Ferrite Core (1) AC power adaptor USB cable (1) 640×480 Power requirements NP-FM50 battery pack (1) 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz A/V connecting cable (1) 8 cm CD adaptor (1) Rated output voltage DC 8.4 V, 1.5 A in operating Mavica disc (2) (CD-R (1), mode CD-RW (1)) Shoulder strap (1) Operating temperature ° ° ° ° Lens cap (1)0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F) Lens cap strap (1) Storage temperature CD-ROM (2) –20°C to +60°C (–4°F to Operating instructions (2) +140°F) 2-pin conversion adaptor (1) Dimensions (Approx.) (E, Hong Kong, Tourist model 125×39×62 mm (5×1 9/16× only) 2 1/2 inches) (w/h/d) Mass (Approx.) Design and specifications 280 g (10 oz) are subject to change without notice.

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT À LA SÉCURITÉ! COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU PUBLISHED BY SONY. DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer. 1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered 4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and and bridges. recommend their replacement. 2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. "pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors. 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing 3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point during repairing. them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the circuit board (within 3 times). • Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering or unsoldering. — 2 —, TABLE OF CONTENTS SERVICE NOTE ····································································· 6 Troubleshooting ···································································1-22 Warning and notice messages ·············································· 1-24 1. GENERAL Self-diagnosis display ·························································· 1-25 Introduction ···········································································1-1 LCD screen indicators ·························································1-25 Getting started Identifying the parts ·······························································1-1 2. DISASSEMBLY Preparing the power supply ···················································1-1 2-1. LCD SECTION (PK-58 BOARD) ··································2-2 Setting the date and time ························································1-3 2-2. CABINET (FRONT) SECTION ·····································2-3 Inserting a disc ·······································································1-3 2-3. LENS SECTION (CD-333/334 BOARD) ·······················2-4 Basic operations 2-4. CABINET (FRONT) ASSEMBLY (TK-61 BOARD), B Recording CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-503) ·······················2-5 Initializing a disc (INITIALIZE) ···········································1-4 2-5. BATTERY HOLDER (JK-208 BOARD) ························2-6 Recording still images ···························································1-4 2-6. SY-67 BOARD ································································2-6 Recording moving images ·····················································1-6 2-7. STROBOSCOPE SECTION (FLASH UNIT) ················2-7 B Playback 2-8. BASE UNIT (DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY) · 2-8 Playing back still images ·······················································1-6 2-9. LID CD SECTION ··························································2-9 Playing back moving images ·················································1-6 2-10. FUNCTION BUTTON (FS-83 BOARD) ·······················2-9 Preparation for viewing images using a computer ·················1-7 2-11. SOLENOID PLUNGER (DOOR LOCK/STROBO- Viewing images using a computer ·········································1-8 SCOPE), CD LOCK SLIDER ·······································2-10 Image file storage destinations and image file names ·········1-10 2-12. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (ZK-503), Advanced operations STRAP SHAFT ·····························································2-11 Before performing advanced operations 2-13. MODE KNOB, POWER SPRING ································2-12 How to use the mode dial ····················································1-10 2-14. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ·································2-13 How to use the control button ·············································· 1-11 2-15. FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ······························ 2-14 How to use the jog dial ························································1-11 Menu settings ······································································· 1-11 Disassembling procedure of Mechanism deck (DDX- Setting the image size (IMAGE SIZE) ································1-12 G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY) are not shown. B Various recording Pages 2-15 and 2-16 are not shown. Recording with the exposure fixed (AE LOCK) ·················1-13 Recording with the manual adjustments ······························ 1-13 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS Recording images according to shooting conditions 3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ···························3-1 (SCENE SELECTION) ······················································· 1-14 3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ···························3-3 Recording three images continuously (BURST) 3-3. MODE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM ·······················3-5 (only for MVC-CD300) ······················································· 1-14 3-4. LCD BLOCK DIAGRAM ··············································3-7 Recording still images for e-mail (E-MAIL) ······················ 1-14 3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) ································3-9 Adding audio files to still images (VOICE) ························1-14 3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ······························ 3-11 Recording text documents (TEXT) ·····································1-14 3-7. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) ······························ 3-13 Recording still images as uncompressed files (TIFF) ·········1-15 Recording three images with the exposure shifted Camera block diagrams and MD block diagrams are (only for MVC-CD300) (EXP BRKTG) ·····························1-15 not shown. Creating Clip Motion Files ·················································· 1-15 Pages from 3-15 to 3-26 are not shown. Setting the distance to the subject ········································1-16 Recording images in macro ·················································1-16 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND Adjusting the exposure (EXPOSURE) ································1-16 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS Adjusting the white balance (WHITE BALANCE) ············1-16 4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2) ·······················4-1 Enjoying picture effects (P. EFFECT) ·································1-16 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2) ·······················4-3 Recording the date and time on the still image 4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND (DATE/TIME) ······································································ 1-17 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ············································4-5 Using the Spot light-metering function ······························· 1-17 • CD-333 (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, B Various playback CCD IMAGER) Playing back three or nine images at once ··························· 1-17 PRINTED WIRING BOARD (CD200) ··········4-7 Enlarging a part of the still image (Zoom and trimming) ····1-17 • CD-334 (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, Playing back the still images in order (SLIDE) ··················· 1-18 CCD IMAGER) Rotating a still image (ROTATE) ·········································1-18 PRINTED WIRING BOARD (CD300) ··········4-9 Viewing images on a TV screen ·········································· 1-18 • CD-333/334 (LCD DRIVE)(1/3) B Editing SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-11 Deleting images (DELETE) ················································1-18 • CD-333/334 (CAMERA PROCESS)(2/3) Preventing accidental erasure (PROTECT) ·························1-19 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-13 Changing the recorded still image size (RESIZE) ··············· 1-19 • CD-333 (CCD IMAGER)(3/3) Selecting still images to print (PRINT) ······························· 1-19 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-15 Formatting a CD-RW ··························································· 1-20 • CD-334 (CCD IMAGER)(3/3) Changing the setup settings (SET UP) ································1-20 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-16 Additional information • TK-61 (LENS CAP DETECT) Precautions ··········································································· 1-21 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-17 On discs ··············································································· 1-21 • TK-61 (LENS CAP DETECT) Using your camera abroad ··················································· 1-22 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-18 About “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack ·································· 1-22 — 3 —, 11. Auto White Balance Adjustment ···································5-19 Schematic diagram and printed wiring board of the SY- 12. Color Reproduction Adjustment ····································5-20 67 and MD-083 boards are not shown. 12-1. Color Reproduction Adjustment ····································5-20 Pages from 4-19 to 4-54 are not shown. 12-2. Color Reproduction Check ·············································5-20 13. White Balance Check ····················································5-21 • CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (ZK-503) 14. CCD White Defect Compensation and Check ··············5-22 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-55 15. CCD Black Defect Compensation and Check ···············5-22 • FS-83 (CHARGER) 16. Strobe Adjustment ·························································5-23 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-56 17. LED Illumination Check ···············································5-24 • FS-83 (CHARGER) 1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ···································5-25 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-57 1. LCD Initial Data Input (1) ·············································5-25 • JK-208 (USB INTERFACE) 2. LCD Initial Data Input (2) ·············································5-26 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-59 3. VCO Adjustment (PK-58 board) ···································5-26 • JK-208 (USB INTERFACE) 4. D Range Adjustment (PK-58 board) ·····························5-27 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-61 5. Bright Adjustment (PK-58 board) ·································5-27 • PK-58 (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, 6. Contrast Adjustment (PK-58 board) ······························5-28 BACK LIGHT) 7. Color Adjustment (PK-58 board) ··································5-28 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-63 8. V-COM Level Adjustment (PK-58 board) ····················5-29 • PK-58 (RGB DRIVE)(1/3) 9. V-COM Adjustment (PK-58 board) ······························5-29 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-67 10. White Balance Adjustment (PK-58 board) ····················5-30 • PK-58 (TIMING GENERATOR)(2/3) 1-6. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ········5-31 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-69 1. Battery End Adjustment (SY-67 board) ·························5-31 • PK-58 (BACK LIGHT)(3/3) 2. Serial No. Input ·····························································5-32 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-71 5-2. SERVICE MODE ··························································5-33 4-3. WAVEFORMS ······························································4-73 2-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER ················5-33 4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ·································4-78 1. Using the Adjustment Remote Commander ··················5-33 2. Precautions Upon Using the Adjustment Remote 5. ADJUSTMENTS Commander ···································································5-33 1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards ·· 5-1 2-2. DATA PROCESS ···························································5-34 5-1. ADJUSTMENT ······························································· 5-2 2-3. SERVICE MODE ··························································5-35 1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT ·················5-2 1. Setting the Test Mode ····················································5-35 1-1-1.List of Service Tools ························································5-2 2. Bit Value Discrimination ···············································5-35 1-1-2.Preparations ·····································································5-3 3. Switch check (1) ····························································5-36 1-1-3.Discharging of the flashlight power supply ·····················5-3 4. Switch check (2) ····························································5-36 1-1-4.Precaution ········································································5-5 5. Switch check (3) ····························································5-36 1. Setting the Switch ····························································5-5 6. Switch check (4) ····························································5-37 2. Order of Adjustments ······················································ 5-5 7. Switch check (5) ····························································5-37 3. Subjects ··········································································· 5-5 8. LED check ·····································································5-37 1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, D, E, F, 7, 9 PAGE DATA ·····5-6 9. Self Diagnosis Log check ··············································5-38 1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF D PAGE DATA ·························· 5-6 10. Record of Use check ······················································5-38 1. Initializing the D Page Data ············································5-6 2. Modification of D Page Data ··········································· 5-6 6. REPAIR PARTS LIST 3. D Page Table ····································································5-6 6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 6-1 1-2-2. Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data ···························· 5-7 6-1-1.OVERALL SECTION ·····················································6-1 1. Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data ···························· 5-7 6-1-2.CABINET (FRONT) SECTION, LENS CABINET 2. Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data ··························· 5-7 SECTION (CD200) ·························································6-2 3. F Page Table ····································································5-7 6-1-3.CABINET (FRONT) SECTION, LENS CABINET 4. 7 Page Table ·····································································5-9 SECTION (CD300) ·························································6-3 5. 9 Page Table ···································································5-10 6-1-4.LENS SECTION ·····························································6-4 6. E Page Table ··································································5-10 6-1-5.CABINET (REAR) SECTION-1 ····································6-5 7. B Page Table ··································································5-10 6-1-6.CABINET (REAR) SECTION-2 ····································6-6 1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ·····························5-11 6-1-7.LID CD SECTION ·························································· 6-7 1. Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-67 board) ············5-11 1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ························5-12 Exploded view and parts list of DDX-G2100 COMPLETE 1. HALL Adjustment (MVC-CD200) ·······························5-12 ASSEMBLY are not shown. 2. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Minipattern Box) ·······5-13 Page 6-8 is not shown. 3. Flange Back Adjustment ···············································5-14 3-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) 6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ·········································· 6-9 (Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart) ························5-14 3-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2)(MVC-CD200) ·················5-14 Electrical parts list of the SY-67 and MD-083 boards 4. Flange Back Check ························································5-15 are not shown. 5. Picture Frame Setting ····················································5-16 Pages from 6-14 to 6-24 are not shown. 6. F No. Standard Data Input ·············································5-17 7. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment ····································5-17 8. Light Value Adjustment ·················································5-18 * LED illumination axis frame and color reproduction frame are 9. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment ···································5-18 shown on pages 160 and 161. 10. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input ·····················5-19 — 4 —,

SERVICE NOTE

• NOTE FOR REPAIR Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of When remove a connector, don't pull at wire of connector. bent at the terminal. Be in danger of the snapping of a wire. Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly. When installing a connector, don't press down at wire of connector. Be in danger of the snapping of a wire. Cut and remove the part of gilt which comes off at the point. (Take care that there are some pieces of gilt left inside) [Discharging of the FLASH unit’s charging capacitor] The charging capacitor of the FLASH unit is charged up to the maximum 300 V potential. There is a danger of electric shock by this high voltage when the capacitor is handled by hand. The electric shock is caused by the charged voltage which is kept without discharging when the main power of the MVC-CD200/CD300 is simply turned off. Therefore, the remaining voltage must be discharged as described below. Preparing the Short Jig Discharging the Capacitor To preparing the short jig. a small clip is attached to each end of a Short circuits between the positive and the negative terminals of resistor of 1 kΩ /1 W (1-215-869-11) charged capacitor with the short jig about 10 seconds. Wrap insulating tape fully around the leads of the resistor to prevent electrical shock. Harness retainer 1 kΩ/1 W Capactior Capactior cap Short jig Wrap insulating tape. — 5 —, [Description on Self-diagnosis Display] Self-diagnosis display • C: ss: ss The contents which can be handled by customer, are displayed. • E: ss: ss The contents which can be handled by engineer, are displayed. Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error Change the disk and turn off the main C:32:01 Defective base unit. DRIVE ERROR power then back on. • The type of CD-R/RW disk that cannot C:13:01 Replace the CD-R/RW disk. be used by this machine, is inserted. DISK ERROR • Data is damaged. Flash LED Checking of flash unit or replacement of Abnormality when flash is being E:91:01 Flash display flash unit charged. Flashing at 3.2 Hz *1 E:61:00 Checking of lens drive circuit When failed in the focus initialization. — *1 E:61:10 Note: The error code is cleared if the battery is removed. *1 : The error display is given in two ways. — 6 —,

MVC-CD200/CD300 SECTION 1 This section is extracted from GENERAL instruction manual.

Getting started

Introduction Identifying the parts

Captures images with your computer See the pages in parentheses for details of operation. You can easily copy images onto your computer through a CD-ROM drive, CD-R drive, CD-RW drive, or the USB cable and view and modify images on your 6 computer using application software. When using a CD-ROM drive to view images 7 on your computer, the finalization is required (page 32). Flow chart for disc operations 8 Start : CD-R19: CD-RW20• A new disc [ ] : Required qa • The disc finalized with a computer or other equipment time qs Initialize 3 qd (page 18) Recording is complete 4 View on the qf camera 5 qg Record (page 28) Disc preparation for Finalize View on a recording is complete. [About 1 min] computer A Shutter button (20, 26) L ACC (Accessory) jack (page 32) (page 35) B Built-in microphone Connects an external flash or other About 13 MB disc Do not touch while recording. equipment. space is used View through C Battery cover (bottom surface) M Lens cap (supplied) the USB cable (9) N USB jack (38) (page 38) D Lens O A/V OUT (MONO) jack (76) E Tripod receptacle (bottom surface) Audio output is monaural. Use a tripod with a screw length of The disc status less than 6.5 mm (7/32 inch). You About the Carl Zeiss lens (MVC- is before Unfinalize View through a CD300 only) finalization [About 1 min] CD-R/CD-RW cannot firmly secure the camera to This camera is equipped with a Carl Zeiss drive tripods having longer screws, and(page 34) lens which is capable of reproducing fine (page 41) may damage the camera. images. The lens for this camera uses theAbout 13 MB disc space restores. F Accessory shoe MTF* measurement system for cameras developed jointly by Carl Zeiss, in G Photocell window for flash Germany, and Sony Corporation, and View through a Do not block while recording with offers the same quality as other Carl Zeiss CD-ROM drive the flash. lenses. (page 37) Flash (24) ∗ MTF is an abbreviation of ModulationH Format Transfer Function/Factor, a numeric Blank disc [About 7 min] Disc preparation I Self-timer lamp/AF illuminator value indicating the amount of light from (page 82) for viewing through (24, 25) a specific part of the subject gathered at The disc space is fully a CD-ROM drive is the corresponding position in the image.J Hook for strap and lens cap available. complete. K Disc cover OPEN lever (16) 6 7

Preparing the power supply

1 qd

POWER

S M ON/OFF(CHG)

Installing the battery pack

T PE US Attaching the Your camera operates only with the NP-FM50 (supplied) “InfoLITHIUM” battery 2 shoulder strap pack* (M series). See page 91 for more information about “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. 3 qf 4 qg1235qh 6 qj17218qk29ql 0 w; Open the battery cover. qa wa 1 Slide the battery cover in the direction of the arrow. qs 2 Install the battery pack. Insert the battery pack with the v mark facing toward the battery compartment A Mode dial (45) M Hook for strap as illustrated. B POWER switch (14) N (Spot meter) button (71) 3 Close the battery cover. C (Exposure) button (67) O AE LOCK button (55) D /CHG (Charge) lamp (10, 25) P Zoom W/T buttons (22) To remove the battery pack E FOCUS button (66) Q Jog dial (48) Open the battery cover. Slide the battery eject lever in the arrow direction, F Photocell window for LCD R POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp and remove the battery pack. screen (14) Be careful not to drop the battery pack when removing it. The LCD screen becomes brighter S Speaker when exposed to sunlight. T Control button (46) G LCD screen U MENU button (46) H Disc window I DISPLAY/LCD BACK LIGHT ON/ Battery eject lever OFF button (23) J ACCESS lamp (20) * What is “InfoLITHIUM”? “InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack which can exchange information such as battery K Reset button (99) consumption with compatible video equipment. “InfoLITHIUM” M series battery packs have L DC IN cover/DC IN jack (10, 13) the mark. “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. 8 9 1-1

SCN

Getting started Getting started

A

,

NP-FM50 (supplied) battery pack Charging the battery pack When you record images in an extremely cold location or using the LCD backlight,

the operating time becomes short. When using the camera in an extremely cold When the camera is turned on, you cannot charge the battery pack. Be sure to turn off location, place the battery pack in your pocket or other places to keep it warm, then the power of the camera. insert the battery pack into the camera just before recording. When using a pocket heater, take care not to let the heater directly contact the battery.

Note on the /CHG lamp during charging

AC-L10A/L10B/L10C The /CHG lamp may flash: AC power adaptor • When a malfunction occurs in the battery pack (page 99). Power cord The /CHG lamp does not light up: (mains lead) • When the battery pack is not installed properly. Charging time32Battery pack Full charge (min.) NP-FM50 (supplied) Approx. 150 to a wall outlet (mains) Approximate time to charge a completely discharged battery pack at a temperature of 1 25°C (77°F). Battery pack Battery life and number of images that can be recorded/played back Still image recording/playback 1 Insert the battery pack into your camera. NP-FM50 (supplied)

Battery life (min.) Number of images

2 Open the DC IN cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack of your camera with the v mark facing up. Continuous recording* Approx. 75 Approx. 800 Continuous playback** Approx. 120 Approx. 1000 3 Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC power adaptor and then to a wall outlet (mains). Approximate battery life and number of images that can be recorded/played back at a The /CHG lamp (orange) above the LCD screen lights up when charging temperature of 25°C (77°F) with a fully charged battery pack, using 640×480 image begins. When the /CHG lamp goes off, full charge is completed. size, standard image quality, and NORMAL recording mode. ∗ Recording at about 5-second intervals

After charging the battery pack ∗∗ Playing back single-displayed images continuously at about 7-second intervals

Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camera. Moving image recording

Battery remaining indicator NP-FM50 (supplied)

The LCD screen on the camera shows the remaining time for which you can still Battery life (min.) record or play back images. This indication may not be entirely accurate depending on the conditions of use and Continuous recording Approx. 120 the operating environment. Approximate time that can be recorded 160×112-sized images at a temperature of Charging at a room temperature of 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) is recommended. 25°C (77°F) with a fully charged battery pack. 10 11 Notes • The battery life and number of images will be decreased when using at low temperature, using Using the AC power adaptor the flash, turning the power on/off frequently, or using the zoom. • The numbers of images shown on tables above are as a guide. The numbers may be smaller depending on conditions. • If sufficient battery remaining time is indicated but the power runs out soon, fully charge the battery so that the correct battery remaining time appears. • Do not short the DC plug of the AC power adaptor with a metallic object, as this may cause a malfunction. AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC power adaptor Power cord (mains lead) 2 1 to a wall outlet (mains) 1 Open the DC IN cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack of your camera with the v mark facing up. 2 Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC power adaptor and then to a wall outlet (mains).

Using a car battery

Use a Sony DC adaptor/charger.

Using your camera abroad

For details, see page 90.

When using the AC power adaptor

Be sure to use it near the wall outlet (mains). If a malfunction occurs, disconnect the plug from the wall outlet (mains). 12 13 1-2

Getting started Getting started

,

Setting the date and time 5 Set the numeric value with v/V on the

control button, then press the center z to When you first use your camera, set the date and time. If these are not set, the enter it. CLOCK SET Y/M/D CLOCK SET screen appears whenever you turn on your camera. After entering the number, v/V moves to the next M/D/Y D/M/Y item. If you selected [D/M/Y] in step 3, set the 2001 / 7 / 1 12 : 00OK

AM

time on a 24-hour cycle. CANCEL

OK

1 6 Select [OK] with B on the control button, 2 then press the center z at the desiredmoment to begin clock movement. CLOCK SET Y/M/D POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp The date and time are entered. M/D/YD/M/Y 2001 / 7 / 4 10 : 30OK3–

PM

6 CANCEL

OK To cancel the date and time setting

Select [CANCEL] with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z. 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, , SCN, or . 2 Push the POWER switch in the arrow direction to turn on the power. The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp (green) lights up. The CLOCK SET screen appears. When resetting the date and time once you set, set the mode dial to SET UP (page 84), and then follow the procedure from step 3. 3 Select the desired date display format with v/V on the control button, then press the center z. CLOCK SET Y/M/D Select from [Y/M/D] (year/month/day), [M/D/Y] M/D/YD/M/Y (month/day/year), or [D/M/Y] (day/month/year). 2001 / 1 / 1 12 : 00OK

AM CANCEL OK

4 Select the year, month, day, hour or minute item you want to set with b/B on the control button. CLOCK SET Y/M/D The item to be set is indicated with v/V. M/D/YD/M/Y 2001 / 1 / 1 12 : 00OK

AM CANCEL OK

14 15

Inserting a disc Removing the disc

You can use only the 8 cm CD-Rs or 8 cm CD-RWs that have these While sliding the lock tab to the left, slide down the disc cover OPEN lever, and open marks. the disc cover after the cover is unlocked. Then, remove the disc as illustrated below. 1 2 Disc cover OPEN lever Lock tab Notes • Before removing the disc, be sure to check that the disc is not rotating. • Do not open the disc cover while the ACCESS lamp is lit. If you do, the recorded image may be damaged or the disc may become unusable. • When writing data on a disc or connecting with a computer using the USB connection, the disc cover OPEN lever is locked. 1 While sliding the lock tab to the left, slide down the disc cover OPEN lever. Open the disc cover by your hand after the cover is unlocked. 2 Place a disc with the printed side up. Push down the center of the disc until it clicks. When installing, do not push with too much force and do not touch the pickup lens. Pickup lens Push here Disc 3 Close the disc cover. 16 17 1-3

Getting started Getting started

,

Basic operations B Recording Initializing a disc (INITIALIZE) What is initialization?

The initialization is required to record images on a disc. When you use a new disc or the disc which was finalized with other equipment than In case that you have executed the finalization (page 32) using the camera to view this camera (page 32), you have to initialize the disc. Before initializing the disc, images on a CD-ROM drive, the initialization is automatically executed. You can push the POWER switch in the arrow direction to turn on the power and insert the continuously record images. When executing the finalization using a computer or disc. other equipment, execute the initialization to record new images. Images recorded before finalization will remain on the disc. Tip 1 You can also execute the initialization using [ ] (DISC TOOL) in the setup settings (page 84). 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, SCN, or . “INITIALIZE PLACE ON LEVEL SURFACE” appears on the LCD screen. Be sure to avoid any vibration during the initialization in step 2. 2 Select [OK] with v on the control button, then press the center z. Initialization starts. INITIALIZE INITIALIZE INITIALIZE AVOID ANY VIBRATION AVOID ANY VIBRATION READY TO INITIALIZE INITIALIZE IN PROGRESS INITIALIZE COMPLETE

To cancel the initialization

Select [CANCEL] with V on the control button, then press the center z.

To initialize after canceling the initialization

Open and close the disc cover. Or set the mode dial to , S, A, M, SCN, or , press v on the control button, then press the center z. 18 19

Recording still images 3 Press the shutter button fully down.

The shutter clicks. “RECORDING” appears on the LCD screen, and the image Still images are recorded in JPEG format. Before recording still images, push the will be recorded on the disc. When “RECORDING” disappears from the LCD POWER switch in the arrow direction to turn on the power and insert a disc. screen, you can start the next recording. 1 2, 3

RECORDING For the number of images you can record on a disc

See page 54. ACCESS lamp Auto power-off function If you do not operate the camera for about three minutes, the camera turns off Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, or SCN. automatically to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To use the camera again,1 push the POWER switch in the arrow direction to turn on the camera again. 2 Press and hold the shutter button halfway down. While the image is being recorded on a disc, the ACCESS lamp lights. The beeps sound. However, the image has not been recorded yet. While the When this lamp is lit, do not shake or strike the camera. Also, do not AE/AF lock indicator z is flashing, the camera automatically adjusts the turn the power off, not remove the battery pack/disc, or not open the exposure and focus of the captured image. When the camera finishes the disc cover. Otherwise, an image data breakdown may occur or the automatic adjustments, the AE/AF lock indicator z stops flashing, then disc may become unusable. lights up, and the camera is ready for recording. If you release the shutter button, the recording will be canceled. Notes AE/AF lock indicator (green) • When using a CD-R, even if you delete images, the disc remaining space does not increase. flashes t lights up • Only when using a CD-RW, the disc remaining space increases after deleting the last-recorded image if the is indicated on the LCD screen before deleting. If you modify an image, or open and close the disc cover, will disappear. • When recording bright subjects, the color of the LCD screen may change after the AE is locked. However, this will not affect the recorded image. • After you change the disc, “REPAIRING DATA” appears on the LCD screen and it may take about 10 minutes to get ready for recording depending on the disc condition. • When you press the shutter button fully down at once, the camera starts recording after the automatic adjustment is complete. However, the recording cannot be carried out while the / CHG lamp (page 8) is flashing. (During this time, the camera is charging the flash.) • When the AE/AF lock indicator flashes slowly, the subject may be hard to focus on because it is too dark or no contrast, or it may be too close to the camera. Release the shutter button, and focus on it again. 20 21 1-4

BBBB Recording BBBB Recording

, Checking the last recorded image (Quick Review) Digital zoom function This camera has a digital zoom function. You can check the last recorded image by clearing the menu from the screen Digital zoom enlarges the image by digital processing, and it starts to function when (page 46) and pressing b (7) on the control button. the zoom exceeds 3×. To return to the normal recording mode: press the shutter button lightly, or press b (7) again. To delete the image: 1. Press MENU. 2. Select [DELETE] with B, then press theWTcenter z. 3. Select [OK] with v, then press the center z. The T-side of the bar shows the

Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen digital zooming zone.

Adjust the brightness with the [LCD BRIGHTNESS] item in the setup settings (page 85). This adjustment does not affect the brightness of the images recorded on the disc. Using digital zoom • The maximum zoom magnification is 6×.

To turn off the LCD backlight • Digital zooming deteriorates the picture quality. When digital zoom is not

Press DISPLAY/LCD BACK LIGHT ON/OFF repeatedly to turn off the LCD necessary, set [DIGITAL ZOOM] to [OFF] in the setup settings (page 84). backlight (page 23). The battery life will be longer. Notes • Digital zoom does not work for moving images. Using the zoom feature • The zoom function does not work while recording a moving image. Set the zoom positionbefore you start recording (MVC-CD300 only). The lens part moves in/out while zooming. Be careful not to touch the lens.

The indicators on the LCD screen during recording

Each time you press DISPLAY/LCD BACK LIGHT ON/OFF, the status of the LCD Zoom buttons screen changes as follows: The LCD backlight is turned on/all the available indicators are turned on t The LCD backlight is turned on/warning messages and manual adjustment W: for wide-angle T: for telephoto items which are set using the jog dial are turned on (subject appears (subject appears t The LCD backlight is turned off/warning messages and manual adjustment farther away) closer) items which are set using the jog dial are turned on See page 105 for a detailed description of the indicators.

If you cannot get a sharp focus on a close subject

Press the zoom W button repeatedly and move closer to the subject until the focus is sharp (page 66). DISPLAY/LCD BACK

Minimum focal distance to the subject LIGHT ON/OFF

W side: Approx. 50 cm (19 3/4 inches) (MVC-CD200) Approx. 50 cm (19 3/4 inches) (MVC-CD300) T side: Approx. 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) (MVC-CD200) Notes Approx. 50 cm (19 3/4 inches) (MVC-CD300) • You cannot turn off the (self-timer) indicator and some of the indicators used in advancedoperations. To record even closer subjects, see page 66. • The indicators on the LCD screen are not recorded. 22 23

Using the self-timer Notes

• When [ISO] is set to [AUTO] in the menu settings (page 49), the recommended shooting When you use the self-timer function, the subject is recorded about 10 seconds after distance is 0.3 to 2.5 m (11 7/8 inches to 8 1/3 feet) (MVC-CD200) or 0.3 to 3.0 m (11 7/8 you press the shutter button. inches to 9 feet 10 1/8 inches) (MVC-CD300). When it is not set to [AUTO], the flash may be ineffective even if the flash level is changed. Self-timer lamp • Attaching a conversion lens (optional) may block the light from the flash and the recorded image may be eclipsed. • You cannot use the built-in flash and an external strobe (optional) at the same time. Shutter button • The RED EYE REDUCTION function may not produce the desired red-eye reduction effects depending on individual differences, the distance to the subject, if the subject does not see the V ( ) on the pre-strobe, or other conditions. control button • Red-eye reduction effects are also difficult to obtain if you select a slow shutter speed in shutter speed priority mode. • The flash effect is not obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright location. • While charging the flash, the /CHG lamp flashes. After the charging is complete, the lamp Clear the menu (page 46), then press V ( ) on the control button. The (self- goes out. timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen, and the subject is recorded about 10 • The flash does not function when recording moving images or recording in EXP BRKTG or seconds after you press the shutter button. After you press the shutter button, the self- BURST mode (MVC-CD300 only) (pages 59, 63). timer lamp flashes until the image is recorded. Recording images with the AF illuminator

Recording images with the flash The AF illuminator is fill light to focus on a subject easily under dark conditions. Set

The initial setting is AUTO (no indication). In this mode, the flash automatically pops [AF ILLUMINATOR] to [ON] in the setup settings, appears on the LCD screen up and strobes if the camera senses that the surroundings become dark. To change the and the AF illuminator emits light when the shutter button is pressed halfway under flash mode, clear the menu (page 46), then press v ( ) on the control button dark situations. It keeps emitting light until the focus is locked. repeatedly so that the flash mode indicator on the LCD screen changes. AF illuminator v ( ) on the control button Notes Each time you press the button, the indicator changes as follows. • If AF illuminator light does not reach the subject sufficiently or the subject has no contrast, (No indication) ttt(No indication) focus will not be achieved. Approximate 0.3 to 3.0 m (11 7/8 inches to 9 feet 10 1/8 inches) Forced flash : The flash strobes regardless of the surrounding brightness. distance is recommended. No flash : The flash does not strobe. • In TWILIGHT mode of the SCENE SELECTION function (page 58), the AF illuminator will Pop down the flash by your hand after recording. emit only when the flash mode is set to (Forced flash). • The AF illuminator will not emit when the LANDSCAPE mode of the SCENE SELECTION function (page 58) is selected or [CONVERSION LENS] is set to [ON] in the setup settings You can change the amount of flash light with [ ±] (FLASH LEVEL) in the menu (page 85). ([CONVERSION LENS] is only for MVC-CD300.) settings (page 50). • Focus is achieved as long as AF illuminator light reaches the subject even if its light is slightly out of the middle position of the subject.

To reduce the red-eye phenomenon • AF illuminator light is safe for persons. However, do not use the AF illuminator with its light

emitted directly to person eyes at point-blank range as its light is very strong. Set [RED EYE REDUCTION] to [ON] in the setup settings (page 84), the flash strobes before recording to reduce the red-eye phenomenon. When [ON] is selected, appears on the LCD screen. 24 25 1-5

BBBB Recording BBBB Recording

,

Recording moving images 5 Set the mode dial to .

The preparation for recording a moving image is complete. Moving images with audio are recorded in MPEG format. Before recording moving images, push the POWER switch in the arrow direction to turn on the power and 6 Press the shutter button fully down. insert a disc. “REC” appears on the LCD screen and the image and sound are recorded on the disc. 6, 7 1, 5 7 Press the shutter button fully down again to stop recording. The recording automatically stops in the following time even if you do not press the shutter button again. When selecting the 320 (HQ) size: Approximate 15 seconds When selecting the 320×240 size: Approximate 1 minute When selecting the 160×112 size: Approximate 4 minutes For details on the image size, see “Setting the image size (IMAGE SIZE)” on page 53. Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen, zooming or using the self-timer See pages 22 to 24. 1 Set the mode dial to SET UP. The setup screen appears. The indicators on the LCD screen during recording 2 Select [ ] (CAMERA) with v/V on the Press DISPLAY/LCD BACK LIGHT ON/OFF to turn on/off the indicators on the control button, then press B. CAMERA SCENE SELECTION: TWIRIGHT LCD screen. MOVING IMAGE: MPEG MOVIE DATE/TIME: OFF These indicators are not recorded. See page 105 for a detailed description of the DIGITAL ZOOM: ON indicators. BRACKET STEP: ±0.7EV RED EYE REDUCTION: OFF AF ILLUMINATOR: ON

SELECT

3 Select [MOVING IMAGE] with v/V on the control button, then press B. CAMERA SCENE SELECTION: MOVING IMAGE: MPEG MOVIE DATE/TIME: CLIP MOTION DIGITAL ZOOM: BRACKET STEP: RED EYE REDUCTION: AF ILLUMINATOR:

OK

4 Select [MPEG MOVIE] with v/V on the control button, then press the center z. CAMERA SCENE SELECTION: TWIRIGHT MOVING IMAGE: MPEG MOVIE DATE/TIME: OFF DIGITAL ZOOM: ON BRACKET STEP: ±0.7EV RED EYE REDUCTION: OFF AF ILLUMINATOR: ON

SELECT

26 27

B Playback Playing back still images Playing back moving images

1122, 3 ACCESS lamp ACCESS lamp 1 Set the mode dial to . 1 Set the mode dial to . The ACCESS lamp lights and the last recorded image (still or moving) appears The ACCESS lamp lights and the last recorded image (still or moving) appears on the LCD screen. on the LCD screen. 2 Select the desired still image with b/B on 2 Select the desired moving image with b/B the control button. 120min 1600 27/28 on the control button. 120min 320 21/28 00:00 b: To display the preceding image. Moving images are displayed one size smaller than

B: To display the next image. still images except when you shot at the 320 (HQ)

(page 53) size. 100-0028 20017410:30PM b: To display the preceding image. MOV00022 20017410:30PM FILE BACK/NEXT VOLUME : To display the next image. PLAY FILE BACK/NEXT VOLUMEB Note 3 Press the center z on the control button to 120min 320 You may not be able to play back images whose image sizes are larger than the maximum image start the playback. 21/2800:04 size that can be used with this camera for recording. The moving image and sound are played back. During playback, B (playback) appears on the LCD

The indicators on the LCD screen during still image playback screen.

MOV00022 20017410:30PM STOP REV/CUE VOLUME Press DISPLAY/LCD BACK LIGHT ON/OFF to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen. See page 106 for a detailed description of the indicators. To stop the playback Press the center z on the control button to stop the playback.

To advance or rewind the moving image

Press b/B on the control button during playback. To return to the normal playback, press the center z. 28 29 1-6

BBBB Recording BBBB Playback

, Adjusting the volume Preparation for viewing images Press v/V on the control button to adjust the volume. using a computer Using the supplied 8 cm CD adaptor v/V on the When your disc drive does not conform to 8 cm CD, use the supplied 8 cm CD control button adaptor. 1 Slide the disc into the inner groove and under two of the tabs on the inner circle of adaptor in the numbered order. The indicators on the LCD screen during moving image playback Printed side of the disc (The other side is Press DISPLAY/LCD BACK LIGHT ON/OFF to turn on/off the indicators on the recordable side.) LCD screen. See page 107 for a detailed description of the indicators. 2 Printed side of the adaptor (SONY is printed on this side and the other side is the luster side.) 2 Pull the third tab out away from the disc and the disc will slip into place. Release the third tab and the disc will be held firmly in place. 30 31 Check that the disc is set correctly in the grooves of the adaptor, Executing the finalization3 that all the tabs are even with the surface of the adaptor, and that 1 Set the mode dial to SET UP.the disc is not protrude from the adaptor. The setup screen appears on the LCD screen. 2 Select [ ] (DISC TOOL) with v/V on the control button, then press B. DISC TOOL FINALIZE: FORMAT: INITIALIZE: UNFINALIZE:

SELECT

If the tabs protrude, press them back down into place. Otherwise, it may cause 3 Select [FINALIZE] with v/V on the control DISC TOOL malfunction of your disc drive. button, then press B. FINALIZE: O K FORMAT: CANCEL INITIALIZE: UNFINALIZE:

OK

4 Select [OK] with v on the control button, then press z. Notes FINALIZE“FINALIZE PLACE ON LEVEL SURFACE” PLACE ON LEVEL SURFACE • The supplied adaptor may not be used with your disc drive. For details, refer to the operating appears on the LCD screen. Be sure to avoid any instructions of the disc drive. vibration during the finalization. READY? • Use the adaptor at a low-speed (8-speed or lower). O KCANCEL • Do not place the adaptor under direct sunlight or near the heat. OK • The adaptor is only used with Mavica discs. This cannot be used with other 8 cm CD-Rs/CD- RWs. 5 Select [OK] with v on the control button, then press z. Finalization starts and the disc remaining indicator changes from to , or from to . Preparing for viewing images on CD-ROM drives (FINALIZE) You can play back the disc recorded with this camera on CD-ROM drives. You have FINALIZE FINALIZE FINALIZE AVOID ANY VIBRATION AVOID ANY VIBRATION to execute the finalization before viewing images on a CD-ROM drive. A disc that has not been executed the finalization cannot be read with CD-ROM drives. READY TO FINALIZE FINALIZE IN PROGRESS FINALIZE COMPLETE

What is finalization?

• The finalization is required to view images on a CD-ROM drive. • You can record new images on the finalized disc if you execute the initialization on it again. The initialization will be automatically executed when the finalization is To cancel the finalization executed using the camera. You have to execute the finalization to view new images Select [CANCEL] with V on the control button in step 4 or 5, then press the center on a CD-ROM drive. Each time you execute the finalization, approximate 13 MB of z. Once the finalization starts, you cannot cancel it. the disc will decrease. We recommend that you execute the finalization onto compiled data at a time. • You can execute the finalization onto the disc later, even if you remove it from the camera. • The CD-ROM drive must conform to the MultiRead type to read the disc that was finalized. 32 33 1-7

BBBB Playback BBBB Playback

, Notes • Viewing images using a It takes for about one minute to execute the finalization. Do not shake or jar the camera during this operation. Place the camera on a stable surface during the finalization. • computerWhen you execute the finalization, we recommend that you use the external power source (page 13). You can view data recorded with your camera on a computer. This section describes the general method for viewing images on a computer and installing the driver into a Canceling the finalization (UNFINALIZE) (only for CD-RWs) computer. Be sure to also see the operation manuals for your computer and application software. To view images on the CD-RW using a CD-ROM drive or CD- When using CD-RWs, you can cancel the last-executed finalization. Once you cancel R drive, the drive must conform to the MultiRead type. Whether your drive conforms it, the disc space for executing the finalization is recovered. to the MultiRead type or not, consult the drive manufacturer. 1 Set the mode dial to the , S, A, M, SCN, or <> .

UNFINALIZE

“UNFINALIZE PLACE ON LEVEL SURFACE” You can view images on a Windows computer in the following three ways, A, B,PLACE ON LEVEL SURFACE appears on the LCD screen. Be sure to avoid any and C. Check the computer environment below, then follow the procedures vibration during the unfinalization. READY? described on pages 37 to 42. O K

CANCEL

OK A Viewing images with a CD-ROM drive (page 37) Select [OK] with on the control button, then press . Finalize the disc beforehand (page 32).2vzUnfinalization starts and the disc remaining indicator changes from to . OS:Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional The above OS is required to be installed at the factory. UNFINALIZE UNFINALIZE UNFINALIZE Operation is not assured in an environment upgraded to the operating systems described AVOID ANY VIBRATION AVOID ANY VIBRATION above. READY TO UNFINALIZE UNFINALIZE IN PROGRESS UNFINALIZE COMPLETE

B Viewing images with a computer connected with the USB

cable (page 38) There are two ways to make the USB connection, which are the normal connection and the PTP connection (page 86). This is set using [USB CONNECT] in the setup

To cancel the unfinalization settings. However, any OS does not conform to [PTP] as of February 2001. Here

Select [CANCEL] with V on the control button in step 2, then press the center z. describes the way using the [NORMAL] setting. When it is canceled, you can continuously record an image on the CD-RW. You do not need to finalize the disc. You have to install the USB driver and the

To unfinalize after canceling the unfinalization software, DirectCD included in the supplied CD-ROM. For details on DirectCD,

Set the mode dial to SET UP, then execute [UNFINALIZE] from [ ] (DISC refer to the software operating instructions of DirectCD. TOOL) in the setup settings (page 84). OS:Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional Notes The above OS is required to be installed at the factory. • Operation is not assured in an environment upgraded to the operating systems describedUnfinalization cannot be executed when you record a new image or edit an image on the CD- above. RW after executing the finalization. • CPU:MMX Pentium 200 MHz or fasterIt takes about one minute to execute the unfinalization. Do not shake or jar the camera during The USB connector must be provided as standard. this operation. Place the camera on a stable surface during the unfinalization. The CD-ROM drive is required for installing the USB driver. Tip You can also execute the unfinalization using [ ] (DISC TOOL) in the setup settings (page 84). 34 35 Notes • Windows and ActiveMovie, DirectShow are either registered trademarks or trademarks of • Operations are not guaranteed if you connect two or more USB equipment to a single computer Microsoft Corporation in the United States and /or other countries. at the same time (except for the USB keyboard and mouse which are provided as standard), or • Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple when using a hub. Computer, Inc. • Depending on the type of USB equipment that is used simultaneously, some equipment may • DirectCD is a trademark of Adaptec, Inc. not operate. • All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of • Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned their respective companies. Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this above. manual.

C Viewing images with a CD-R/CD-RW drive (page 41)

You do not need to finalize the disc. You have to install the software, DirectCD Viewing images on a Windows computer included in the supplied CD-ROM. For details on Windows environment, refer to the When playing back moving images, Real Player or Windows Media Player must be software operating instructions of DirectCD. installed into your computer. <> A Viewing images with a CD-ROM drive You cannot view images on a Macintosh computer by USB connection. Finalize the disc beforehand (page 32). Install the driver, Adaptec UDF Volume Access included in the supplied CD-ROM into your computer and finalize the disc to view images. E.g., for Windows Me users Start up your computer and insert the disc into the CD-ROM drive Macintosh computer with the Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 standard installation 1 of your computer. QuickTime 3.0 or later must be installed. 2 Open [ My Computer] and double click the drive recognizing theNote disc (Example:[ CD-ROM (D:)]). Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned above. 3 Double-click the desired data file. For the detailed folder and file names, see “Image file storage destinations and

Notes on using your computer image file names” (page 43). Software Desired file Double-click in this order

• Data recorded with your camera is stored in the following formats. Make sure that type applications that support these file formats are installed on your computer. Still image “DCIM” folder t “100MSDCF” folder t Image file — Still image (except TEXT mode, uncompressed mode and Clip Motion): JPEG format Moving image* “MSSONY” folder t “MOML0001” folder t Image file — Moving image/Voice memo: MPEG format Audio* “MSSONY” folder t “MOMLV100” folder t Audio file — Uncompressed mode still image: TIFF mode Clip Motion “DCIM” folder t “100MSDCF” folder t Image file — TEXT mode/Clip Motion: GIF format. image • Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open E-mail image “MSSONY” folder t “IMCIF100” folder t Image file a still image file. Tiff image • When you copy the image to the camera from your computer, which was modified (uncompressed) with a retouching software and was converted to another file format, the “FILE ERROR” message may appear and you may be unable to open the image. ∗ Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing is recommended. If you • Depending on your application software, only the first frame of the Clip Motion file play back the file directly from the disc, the image and sound may break off. may be played back.

Communications with your computer (for Windows only)

Communications between your camera and your computer may not recover after recovering from Suspend or Sleep. 36 37 1-8

BBBB Playback BBBB Playback

,

B Viewing images with a computer connected with the USB cable

7 Connect the USB jack on your camera with the USB connector on Once you install DirectCD included in the supplied CD-ROM, you do not need to your computer using the supplied USB cable. finalize the disc to view images on the disc. You can exchange data between the camera and a computer using the supplied USB cable and CD-ROMs.

Installing the USB driver to the USB connector to the USB jack Do not connect the camera to the computer yet.

Push the Before connecting your camera to your computer, install the USB driver to the USB computer. The USB driver is contained in the supplied CD-ROM (SPVD-006). computer connector as far cable as it will go If the drive is not recognized, see “Troubleshooting” on page 93. The computer automatically recognizes the camera.

E.g., for Windows Me users 8 Open [ My Computer], the newly recognized drive (Example: (E:)) is added.

1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load. Installing driver is complete. Do not connect the USB cable in this step. 9 Insert the disc into the camera, connect the AC power adaptor to 2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM (SPVD-006) in the CD-ROM drive of the camera, then turn on the power of the camera. your computer Go to “Viewing images” below. If you remove the disc without viewing an If the setup screen of DirectCD appears, click [Finish] on the screen. image, be sure to read “Before disconnecting the USB cable” on page 40. 3 Open [ My Computer] on Windows and right-click the CD-ROM drive (Example: CD-ROM (D:)), then select [Open (O)]. Viewing images The file list of the CD-ROM appears. If other application software works, quit When you view images on the disc which was not finalized, you have to install the application software. DirectCD included in the supplied CD-ROM. For details on DirectCD, refer to the 4 Double-click the [SONY USB] folder in the file list, and then double- software operating instructions of DirectCD. click [ SET UP]. The installer of device driver starts and the necessary files are automatically E.g., for Windows Me users copied to the computer. 1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load. 5 Restart the computer. If the message appears after the installation to verify that you restart the 2 Connect the USB jack on your camera with the USB connector onyour computer using the supplied USB cable. computer, restart the computer. In other cases, restart it manually. 6 Prepare the camera before connecting the computer. • Connect the AC power adaptor to the camera. • Turn on the camera. to the USB connector to the USB jack Push the

USB

computer connector as far cable as it will go 3 Insert the disc into the camera, connect the AC power adaptor to the camera, then turn on the power of the camera. “USB MODE” appears on the LCD screen of the camera. 38 39 4 Open [ My Computer] on Windows and double-click the newly 1 Remove the disc. recognized drive. (Example: [ CD Mavica (E:)]) For details, refer to the software operating instructions of DirectCD. The folders inside the disc are displayed, and the disc cover of the camera will be locked. To remove the disc, carry out the operation for removing the disc 2 When using Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional: described on the software operating instructions of DirectCD. If the drive is not recognized, see “Troubleshooting” on page 93. 1 Select the applicable drive from [ ] on the task bar, then stop it. 5 Select and double-click the desired image/sound file from the folder. 2 After the message informing you that the drive has been removed safely For the detailed folder and file names, see “Image file storage destinations and appears, disconnect the USB cable. image file names” (page 43). When using other operating systems than above: Desired file Double-click in this order Simply, disconnect the USB cable. type Still image “DCIM” folder t “100MSDCF” folder t Image file C Viewing images using a CD-R/CD-RW drive Moving image* “MSSONY” folder t “MOML0001” folder t Image file You do not need to finalize the disc. You have to install DirectCD included in the Audio* “MSSONY” folder t “MOMLV100” folder t Audio file supplied CD-ROM. For details on DirectCD, refer to the software operating Clip Motion “DCIM” folder t “100MSDCF” folder t Image file instructions of DirectCD. image E-mail image “MSSONY” folder t “IMCIF100” folder t Image file Viewing images on a Macintosh computer Tiff image (uncompressed) Viewing images with a CD-ROM drive Finalize the disc beforehand (page 32). You have to install the driver, Adaptec UDF ∗ Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing is recommended. If you Volume Access included in the supplied CD-ROM (SPVD-006). play back the file directly from the disc, the image and sound may break off. 1 Start up your computer and allow the Mac OS to load. Before you remove the disc, be sure to read “Before disconnecting the USB cable” on page 40. 2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM (SPVD-006) in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.

Copying a file in the disc to a computer 3 Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon to open the window.

Select the desired file, and drag it to the desired drive or folder. 4 Double-click the icon of the hard disk containing the OS to open the window.

Copying a file in a computer to a disc

Once you install DirectCD included in the supplied CD-ROM into your computer, 5 Move the driver, “Adaptec UDF Volume Access” from the windowopened in step 3 to the “System Folder” folder in the window you can drag and drop the desired file to the disc. To view the image using this opened in step 4 (drag and drop). camera, the file name format must be as follows, “DSC0ssss.JPG”. For details, see “Image file storage destinations and image file names” (page 43). 6 When “Put these items into the Extensions folder?” appears, click “OK.”

Before disconnecting the USB cable 7 Restart your computer.

Before disconnecting the USB cable, you must carry out the operation for removing the disc. This operation is described in “Removing the disc” of the software operating instructions of DirectCD. Viewing images The data in the disc may be broken if you do not carry out this operation. Refer to the procedure below. 1 Start up your computer and insert the disc into the CD-ROM drive of your computer. 40 41 1-9

BBBB Playback BBBB Playback

, 2 Double click the disc folder. Image file storage destinations 3 Double-click the desired data file. and image file names For the detailed folder and file names, see “Image file storage destinations and image file names” (page 43). Image files recorded with your camera are grouped in folders by recording mode. The meanings of the file names are as follows. ssss stands for any number Desired file Double-click in this order within the range from 0001 to 9999. type Still image “DCIM” folder t “100MSDCF” folder t Image file E.g., for Windows Me users (The drive recognizing the camera is “E.”) Moving image* “MSSONY” folder t “MOML0001” folder t Image file Audio* “MSSONY” folder t “MOMLV100” folder t Audio file Clip Motion “DCIM” folder t “100MSDCF” folder t Image file Folder containing still image recorded in image normal mode, TEXT mode image and Clip E-mail image “MSSONY” folder t “IMCIF100” folder t Image file Motion image data Tiff image (uncompressed) Folder containing E-MAIL mode and TIFF mode image data ∗ Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing is recommended. If you play back the file directly from the disc, the image and sound may break off. Folder containing moving image data Folder containing VOICE mode audio data

Folder File Meaning

100MSDCF DSC0ssss.JPG • Still image file recorded normally • Still image file recorded in — E-MAIL mode (page 59) — TIFF mode (page 62) — VOICE mode (page 60) CLP0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion file recorded in NORMAL mode (page 64) CLP0ssss.THM • Index image file of Clip Motion file recorded in NORMAL mode MBL0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion file recorded in MOBILE mode (page 64) MBL0ssss.THM • Index image file of Clip Motion file recorded in MOBILE mode TXT0ssss.GIF • Still image file recorded in TEXT mode (page 61) TXT0ssss.THM • Index image file of still image file recorded in TEXT mode 42 43

Advanced operations Folder File Meaning Before performing advanced

IMCIF100 DSC0ssss.JPG • Small-size image file recorded in E- MAIL mode (page 59) operations DSC0ssss.TIF • Uncompressed image file recorded in TIFF mode (page 62) This section describes the basic control methods that are frequently used for MOML0001 MOV0ssss.MPG • Moving image file recorded normally “Advanced operations.” MOMLV100 DSC0ssss.MPG • Audio file recorded in VOICE mode (page 60) The numerical portions of the following files are the same. How to use the mode dial —A small-size image file recorded in E-MAIL mode and its corresponding image file —An uncompressed image file recorded in TIFF mode and its corresponding image file The mode dial switches the function which is used for recording, playback, or —An audio file recorded in VOICE mode and its corresponding image file editing. The SET UP position changes the settings of infrequently-used items —An image file recorded in TEXT mode and its corresponding index image file (page 84). Set the dial as follows before starting to operate your camera. —An image file recorded with Clip Motion and its corresponding index image file TipSMThe digital still camera saves recorded images as digital data. The format of the T PU saved data is called as the file format. The formats that can be used with this ES camera are as follows: : To record still images, VOICE memos JPEG format S: To record in the shutter speed priority modeA: To record in the aperture priority mode Most digital still cameras, operating systems of computers, and browser software M: To record with the shutter speed and aperture adopt this format. This format is able to compress files without appreciable set manually deterioration. However, if the image is compressed and saved on repeated SCN: To record in the SCENE SELECTION mode occasions, the image will deteriorate. This camera records still images using the SET UP: To display the setup items JPEG format for normal recording. : To record moving images or Clip Motion images GIF format : To play back or edit images Using this format, the image will not deteriorate even if the image is compressed and saved on repeated occasions. This format limits the number of colors to 256 colors. This camera records still images using the GIF format in Clip Motion (page 64) or TEXT mode (page 61). TIFF format Stores shooting images without compression, so the image does not deteriorate. Most of operating systems and applications correspond to this format. This camera records still images using the TIFF format for the TIFF mode (page 62). MPEG format This format is very typical for moving images. This camera records audio using the MPEG format for the moving images recording and the VOICE mode (page 60). 44 45 1-10

SCN Playback Before performing advanced operationsBBBB A

,

How to use the control button 2 When the mode dial is set to Example: SET UPSET UP or :

1 Press v/V/b/B on the control When the menu or setup screen is displayed, the control button is used to select the button to select the item or buttons, images and menu items displayed on the LCD screen of your camera and setting you want to set up. modify the settings. The operation methods that are frequently used for “Advanced The selected setting turns operations” are described below. yellow. DELETE PROTECT PRINT SLIDE 2 Press the center z to enter the OK item. DELETE PROTECT PRINT SLIDE

OK

When the mode dial is set to Example: , S, A, M, SCN, or : Press v/V/b/B on the control Turning on/off the operation buttons (menu) on the LCD screen button to select the setting of the item. ONE PUSH

AUTO

The selected setting turns yellow, IN DOOR OUT DOOR and the setup is complete. WHITE BAL ISO MODE Press MENU to display/clear the menu on the LCD screen. DELETE PROTECT PRINT SLIDE

OK

Menu Setting up the items in the setup or menu 1 Set the mode dial to SET UP so that the setup screen appears, or press MENU so that the menu appears. 46 47

How to use the jog dial 3 Press the jog dial.The value number turns to yellow. To adjust the value, repeat step

2. The functions which are used frequently are set up using the jog dial and the following direct buttons. The jog dial is used to change the value in manual adjustments. Viewing the next/previous image using the jog dial during playback FOCUS* When viewing an image in single-image mode (page 72), you can easily view the ** next/previous image by turning the jog dial. Mode dial (S, A, M)

Menu settings

Menu items that can be modified differ depending on the positions of the mode dial. The LCD screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment. Initial settings are indicated with x.

When the mode dial is set to /S/A/M/SCN

∗ This button is available when the mode dial is set to , S, A, M, SCN, or . ∗∗ This button is available when the mode dial is set to , S, A, SCN, or . Item Setting Description WB ONE PUSH Sets the white balance (page 68). 1 Press FOCUS or , or set the mode dial to S, A, or M. (WHITE xAUTO BAL) IN DOOR 2 Turn the jog dial to select the item or value OUT DOOR number you want to adjust. ISO 400 Selects the ISO film speed. When recording • When the indication b at the right end on the LCD 200 under dark situations or recording a fast-moving screen is in yellow, you can select the item. In such 100 subject, use a high-number setting. When you cases, go to step 3. Yellow xAUTO record high-quality images, use a low-number setting (except when the mode dial is set to

M

449 SCN). 0.8m +2.0EV F5.6 MVC-CD200 Selects the image size when recording still 60 (IMAGE x1600×1200 images (page 53). SIZE) 1600 (3:2) 1024×768 640×480 • When the value number at the right end on the LCD screen is in yellow, you can adjust the value. M MVC-CD300449 (When you press FOCUS, the 9 mark appears on 0.6m x2048×1536+2.0EV value number position.) F5.6 2048 (3:2)60 When you adjust only the value, the adjustment is 1600×1200 complete. 1280×960 640×480 Yellow 48 49 1-11

Before performing advanced operations Before performing advanced operations

,

Item Setting Description Item Setting Description

xFINE Records still images in the fine image quality PFX SOLARIZE Sets the image special effects (page 69). (P. QUALITY) mode. (P. EFFECT) B&W STANDARD Records still images in the standard image SEPIA quality mode. NEG.ART MODE TIFF Records a TIFF (uncompressed) file in addition xOFF (REC to the JPEG file (page 62). MODE) TEXT Records a GIF file in black-and-white (page 61). When the mode dial is set to ([MOVING IMAGE] is set to VOICE Records an audio file (with a still image) in [CLIP MOTION] in the setup settings.) addition to the JPEG file (page 60). Item Setting Description E-MAIL Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG file in WB ONE PUSH Sets the white balance (page 68). addition to the selected image size (page 59). (WHITE xAUTO EXP BRKTG Records three images with the exposure value of BAL) IN DOOR (MVC-CD300 each image shifted a little (page 63). OUT DOOR only) xNORMAL Selects the Clip Motion image size (page 53). BURST (MVC- Records three images continuously (page 59). (IMAGE MOBILE CD300 only) SIZE) xNORMAL Records an image using the normal recording ± HIGH Makes the flash level higher than normal. mode. (FLASH xNORMAL Normal setting. ± HIGH Makes the flash level higher than normal. LEVEL) LOW Makes the flash level lower than normal. (FLASH xNORMAL Normal setting. LEVEL) PFX SOLARIZE Sets the image special effects (page 69). LOW Makes the flash level lower than normal. (P. EFFECT) B&W PFX SOLARIZE Sets the image special effects (page 69). SEPIA (P. EFFECT) B&W NEG.ART SEPIA xOFF NEG.ART +2 to –2 Adjusts the sharpness of the image. xOFF (SHARPNESS) The indicator appears (except when the +2 to –2 Adjusts the sharpness of the image. setting is 0). (SHARPNESS) The indicator appears (except when the setting is 0). When the mode dial is set to

When the mode dial is set to ([MOVING IMAGE] is set to Item Setting Description

[MPEG MOVIE] in the setup settings.) DELETE OK Deletes the displayed image (page 77). CANCEL Cancels deleting of the image.

Item Setting Description

PROTECT – Protects images against accidental erasure WB ONE PUSH Sets the white balance (page 68). (page 78). (WHITE xAUTO BAL) IN DOOR PRINT – Marks the print mark on still images (page 81). OUT DOOR 320 (HQ) Selects the MPEG image size when recording (IMAGE 320×240 moving images (page 53). SIZE) x160×112 50 51

Item Setting Description Setting the image size (IMAGE SIZE)

SLIDE* INTERVAL Sets the slide show interval. x5 sec/10 sec/30 sec/1 min REPEAT A slide show can be repeated for up to approx. 20 minutes. 1 xON/OFF START Starts the slide show. CANCEL Cancels the slide show. RESIZE* MVC-CD200 Changes the recorded image size (page 80). 3 1600×1200 Control button 1024×768 640×480 CANCEL 2 MVC-CD300 2048×1536 1600×1200 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, SCN, or . 1280×960 640×480 2 Press MENU. CANCEL The menu appears. ROTATE* – Rotates the still image (page 75). 3 Select the desired image size with v/V on the control button from [ ] (IMAGE SIZE). ∗ Only in single-image mode. Still image sizes: MVC-CD200: 1600×1200, 1600 (3:2)*, 1024×768, 640×480 MVC-CD300: 2048×1536, 2048 (3:2)*, 1600×1200, 1280×960, 640×480 ∗ The image is recorded in the ratio of three to two to fit the printing paper size. Using this image size, the margin of an image is not printed out. However, the slight amount of the upper and lower black portions are displayed on the LCD screen. Moving image (MPEG movie) sizes: 320 (HQ)*, 320×240, 160×112 ∗ High Quality mode Moving image (Clip Motion) sizes: MOBILE (80×72), NORMAL (160×120) 52 53 1-12

Before performing advanced operations Before performing advanced operations

, The number of images* or the time** that you can record on a disc B Various recording To release AE LOCK

MVC-CD200 MVC-CD300 Carry out one of the followings:

• Press AE LOCK again after step 2.

Image size Quality Image size Quality Recording with the STANDARD FINE STANDARD FINE exposure fixed (AE

• Release your finger from the shutter

LOCK) button after step 3.

1600×1200 Approx. Approx. 2048×1536 Approx. Approx. 81 • Press down the shutter button in stepMode dial: /S/A/SCN 237 132 147 4. 1600 (3:2) Approx. Approx. 2048 (3:2) Approx. Approx. 81 Once you press AE LOCK, the 237 132 147 exposure, now captured, is fixed. For instance, this function is convenient in 1024×768 Approx. Approx. 1600×1200 Approx. Approx. the following use: 500 321 237 132 Measure the exposure of the desired 640×480 Approx. Approx. 1280×960 Approx. Approx. portion of the subject using the spot 1300 663 349 197 light-metering function and fix its 320 (HQ) Approx. 355 (15) sec ** 640×480 Approx. Approx. exposure value by pressing AE LOCK. 320×240 Approx. 1420 (60) sec ** 1300 663 Then, recompose the picture. 160×112 Approx. 5400 (240) sec ** 320 (HQ) Approx. 355 (15) sec ** 3, 4 MOBILE Approx. 1430 320×240 Approx. 1420 (60) sec ** 1 NORMAL Approx. 560 160×112 Approx. 5400 (240) sec ** 2 MOBILE Approx. 1430 NORMAL Approx. 560 ∗ When MODE (REC MODE) is set to NORMAL. ∗∗ The numbers in parentheses indicate the maximum recording time in continuous recording 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, or SCN. Note The number of images recordable on a disc may decrease depending on conditions. 2 Target the subject that has desired exposure value, then Tip press AE LOCK. The size of the image is indicated by the pixel unit. The higher the number of pixels, the more The exposure is fixed and the AE- information is included. So, an image that is saved using a large number of pixels is suitable L mark appears. for a large-format print and one that is saved using a smaller number of pixels is suitable for attaching to an E-mail. Normally, an image is recorded in the ratio of four to three to fit the 3 Target the subject you want monitor ratio. This camera can also record the image in the ratio of three to two to to record and press and hold accommodate the most common printing paper size. This is the same ratio as the one used in the shutter button halfway photo-developing shops. down. The focus is automatically adjusted. 4 Press down the shutter button. 2048×1536 2048 (3:2) 54 55

Recording with the Aperture priority mode Manual exposure mode

Note If the setting is not appropriate in aperture manual adjustments Once the aperture is adjusted manually, You can manually adjust the shutter priority mode, shutter speed priority mode, Mode dial: S/A/M the shutter speed will be automatically speed and aperture values to achieve or manual exposure mode, the setting value adjusted to the suitable value to attain the desired shooting condition indicator on the LCD screen flashes when the shutter button is pressed halfway down. correct exposure according to the according to your purpose. The Shutter speed priority mode You can record in this setting, we, however,brightness of the subject. As selecting exposure value appears on the LCD recommend that you adjust the flashed- a narrow aperture, the lens iris opens. screen (page 67). And you can also Once the shutter speed is adjusted value again.Using a narrow aperture, you can adjust this value according to your manually, the aperture will be record a subject with its background taste. 0 EV is the most suitable value automatically adjusted to the suitable unclear. And using a wide aperture, set by the camera. value to attain correct exposure you can record both the subject and the according to the brightness of the background stand out clearly. subject. Using the higher shutter speed, you can record a fast-moving subject 1 with its motion frozen. And using the 2–5 lower shutter speed, you can record the 1 flow motion of a moving subject. 211Set the mode dial to M.2 1 Set the mode dial to A. 640FINE M449 +1.0EV 2 Select an aperture value with F5.660 the jog dial, then press the jog dial. 1 Set the mode dial to S. The aperture value can be selected from F2.8 to F11 (MVC-CD200) 2 Select a shutter speed with or from F2 to F8 (MVC-CD300) 2 Select the aperture value the jog dial, then press the by 1/3 step. indication with the jog dial, jog dial. then press the jog dial. The shutter speed can be selected from 8'' to 1/800 (MVC-CD200) or 3 Select the aperture value with 8'' to 1/1000 (MVC-CD300) by 1/3 the jog dial, then press the step. jog dial. 4 Select the shutter speed value indication with the jog dial, then press the jog dial. 5 Select the shutter speed value with the jog dial. For details on available values, see “Shutter speed priority mode” on page 56, or “Aperture priority mode” on page 56. 56 57 1-13

BBBB Various recording BBBB Various recording

,

To cancel the SCENE Recording images SELECTION function Recording three Recording still

according to shooting Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, SET images continuously images for e-mail (E- conditions (SCENE UP, , or . (BURST) (only for MAIL)

SELECTION) Notes MVC-CD300) Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN

Mode dial: SCN • You can focus only on distant subjects in Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN LANDSCAPE mode. In the E-MAIL mode, a small-size This camera has preset three SCENE • Set the forced flash when you use the This mode is used for a continuous image which is suitable for e-mail SELECTION modes. Each mode is flash in the following modes: transmission is also recorded at the—TWILIGHT mode recording. Press the shutter button in suitable for the following situations; this mode, the camera records three same time as recording a normal still—LANDSCAPE mode night scene, landscape, and portrait. • When using the SCENE SELECTION images continuously. image. (The size of the normal still mode, the AF illuminator (page 25) emits image is set using [ ] (IMAGE in the following conditions: 4 SIZE) in the menu settings (page 53).) 1, 4 —TWILIGHT mode: when the flash mode 1 is set to the forced flash mode 4 —PORTRAIT mode: when the subject is 1 2, 3 under dark situations 3 • When the LANDSCAPE mode is selected, 2 the AF illuminator cannot be used. 3 Tip 1 Set the mode dial to SET UP. Under normal recording conditions, the 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, The setup screen appears. camera automatically makes various M, or SCN. adjustments, such as those for the focus, 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, 2 Select [ ] (CAMERA) with iris, exposure, and white balance, as it 2 Press MENU. M, or SCN. v/V, [SCENE SELECTION] shoots. However, you may not be able to The menu appears. Press MENU. with B/v/V, then press B. carry out your desired shooting depending on shooting conditions. The 3 Select [MODE] (REC MODE) The menu appears. 3 Select the desired setting, SCENE SELECTION function provides with b/B, [BURST] with v/V. 3 Select [MODE] (REC MODE)then press z. you with near-optimum adjustments to 4 Record the image. with b/B, [E-MAIL] with v/V.suit your shooting situation. TWILIGHT mode 4 Record the image. You can record the subject without losing the dark atmosphere of the To return to normal surroundings. We recommend that recording mode The number of images that you can you use a tripod to prevent camera- Select [NORMAL] with v/V in step 3. record on a disc in E-MAIL mode shake as the shutter speed is set MVC-CD200 slow in this mode. Notes • You cannot use the flash in this mode. Image size Quality LANDSCAPE mode • During recording in this mode, the image STANDARD FINE Focuses only on a distant subject to is not displayed on the LCD screen. Make the composition before pressing the shutter record landscapes, etc. 1600×1200 Approx. Approx.button. 216 126 • The recording interval is approximate 0.6 PORTRAIT mode second. 1600 (3:2) Approx. Approx. Suits for portrait recordings. • The shutter speed more than 1'' cannot be 216 126 Backgrounds blurred away, and the selected in BURST mode. 1024×768 Approx. Approx. frontward person is sharpened. 416 285 4 Set the mode dial to SCN. 640×480 Approx. Approx. The selected setting is loaded. 855 524 58 59 MVC-CD300 Image size Quality

Image size Quality Adding audio files to Recording text

still images (VOICE) STANDARD FINE documents (TEXT) STANDARD FINE Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN 1024×768 Approx. Approx. Mode dial: 2048×1536 Approx. Approx. 369 262 138 79 In the VOICE mode, the audio is also 640×480 Approx. Approx. The TEXT mode is suitable for recorded at the same time as recording recording a document to emphasize its 2048 (3:2) Approx. Approx. 677 451 138 79 a still image. You can vividly record character by the black and white the situation with audio. MVC-CD300 colors. The LCD screen also turns to 1600×1200 Approx. Approx.

Image size Quality black and white, and the image is216 126 4 recorded in the GIF format.

1280×960 Approx. Approx. 1 STANDARD FINE 306 182 2048×1536 Approx. Approx. 4 640×480 Approx. Approx. 3 133 77 855 524 2 2048 (3:2) Approx. Approx. 133 77 3

To return to normal 1600×1200 Approx. Approx. 2

recording mode 1 203 1213 Set the mode dial to , S, A,Select [NORMAL] with v/V in step . M, or SCN. 1280×960 Approx. Approx. 280 172 1 Set the mode dial to . 2 Press MENU. The menu appears. 640×480 Approx. Approx. 2 Press MENU. 677 451 The menu appears. 3 Select [MODE] (REC MODE) with b/B, [VOICE] with v/V. ∗ When recording 5-second audio. 3 Select [MODE] (REC MODE) with b/B, [TEXT] with v/V. 4 Record the image. To return to normal If you press and release the recording mode 4 Record the image. shutter button, sound is Select [NORMAL] with v/V in step 3. recorded for five seconds. If you hold down the shutter The number of images that you can button, sound is recorded until record on a disc in TEXT mode* you release the shutter button for MVC-CD200 up to 40 seconds.

Image size

1600×1200 Minimum 330 The number of images that you can record on a disc in VOICE mode* 1600 (3:2) Minimum 361 1024×768 Minimum 618 MVC-CD200 640×480 Minimum 974

Image size Quality

STANDARD FINE MVC-CD300 1600×1200 Approx. Approx. Image size 203 121 2048×1536 Minimum 221 1600 (3:2) Approx. Approx. 2048 (3:2) Minimum 244 203 121 1600×1200 Minimum 330 60 61 1-14

BBBB Various recording BBBB Various recording

,

Image size MVC-CD300Recording still Recording three

1280×960 Minimum 462 Image size Qualityimages as images with the 640×480 Minimum 974 uncompressed files STANDARD FINE exposure shifted (only ∗ The maximum number of recordable (TIFF) 2048×1536 Approx. Approx. for MVC-CD300) (EXP images depends on the document 12 11Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN BRKTG) condition, such as the amount of text 2048 (3:2) Approx. Approx. portions. Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCNRecords the images without 14 13 compression, so the image does not

To return to normal The camera continuously records threedeteriorate. Images recorded in this

recording mode To return to normal images with each exposure valuemode are suitable for printing with a recording mode shifted. The exposure compensation Select [NORMAL] with v/V in step 3. high-quality image. The JPEG Select [NORMAL] with v/V in step 3. value can be set between ±1.0 EV from (compressed) format image is also the correct exposure value by 1/3 EV. Notes recorded with the TIFF format image. Notes • If the subject is not evenly illuminated, you may be unable to record a clear image. 4 • JPEG images are recorded in the image • Reading and writing data takes more time size selected by the [ ] (IMAGE SIZE) 1, 41 than normal image recording. menu (page 53). TIFF images are recorded • When the mode dial is set to M or SCN, in [1600×1200] (MVC-CD200) or 2, 3, 6 the image may be bleached out or may be 3 [2048×1536] (MVC-CD300) size other turned black. than when [1600 (3:2)] (MVC-CD200) or 52 • The number of recordable images is the [2048 (3:2)] (MVC-CD300) is selected. same regardless of whether [ ] (P. • Writing data takes more time than in QUALITY) is set to [STANDARD] or normal recording. 1 Set the mode dial to SET UP. [FINE]. 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, The setup screen appears. M, or SCN. 2 Select [ ] (CAMERA) with2 Press MENU. v/V, [BRACKET STEP] with The menu appears. B/v/V, then press B. 3 Select [MODE] (REC MODE) 3 Select the desired bracket with b/B, [TIFF] with v/V. step value with v/V, then press z. 4 Record the image. ±1.0EV: Shifts the exposure value by plus or minus 1.0EV. ±0.7EV: Shifts the exposure value The number of images that you can by plus or minus 0.7EV. record on a disc in TIFF mode ±0.3EV: Shifts the exposure value MVC-CD200 by plus or minus 0.3EV.

Image size Quality 4 Set the mode dial to , S, A,

STANDARD FINE M, or SCN. 1600×1200 Approx. Approx. 5 Press MENU. 20 19 The menu appears. 1600 (3:2) Approx. Approx. 6 Select [MODE] (REC MODE) 22 21 with b/B, [EXP BRKTG] with v/V. 7 Record the image. 62 63

To return to normal ∗ When recording 10 frames per Clip

recording mode Creating Clip Motion 6 Record the image for the first Motion fileframe. Select [NORMAL] with v/V in step 6. Files ∗∗ When recording 2 frames per Clip Mode dial: 60min 160 Motion file2/10 Notes Notes • You cannot use the flash in this mode. Clip Motion is an animation function • Reading and writing data takes more time • During recording, the image is not that plays back still images in MAKING “CLIP MOTION” than normal image recording. displayed on the LCD screen. Make the succession. The images are stored in • Due to the limitations of the GIF format, composition before pressing the shutter GIF format, which is convenient for the number of colors for Clip Motion button. creating home pages or attaching images is reduced to 256 colors or less. • Focus and white balance are adjusted Before carrying out step 8, the against the first image and this setting is images to an e-mail. images are temporarily stored in Therefore, the picture quality may memory. These images are not deteriorate for some images.also used for the other images. 6, 7 recorded on the disc, yet. • The file size is reduced in MOBILE mode,• When the exposure is manually adjusted, so the picture quality deteriorates. the adjusted value is used for the center 1, 3 7 Record the image for the next • GIF files not created on this camera mayvalue. not be displayed correctly. • The recording interval is approximate 0.6 2, 5, 8 frame. second. Image recording can be repeated • All the frame images are immediately 4 recorded on the disc if the mode dial isup to the maximum number of switched or the power is turned off. recordable frames. 1 Set the mode dial to SET UP. 8 Press z. The setup screen appears. All the frame images are recorded on the disc. 2 Select [ ] (CAMERA) with v/V, [MOVING IMAGE] with B/ v/V, [CLIP MOTION] with / , To delete some of the framevVthen press . images or all the frame z images 3 Set the mode dial to . 1 Press b (7) in step 6 or 7. The recorded frame images are 4 Press MENU. played back in turn. The menu appears. 2 Press MENU, and select [DELETE 5 Select the desired mode from LAST] or [DELETE ALL], then [ ] (IMAGE SIZE) with v/V. press z. 3 Select [OK] with v/V, then press NORMAL (160×120) Clip Motion of up to 10 frames can z. be recorded. When [DELETE LAST] is selected This is suitable for use on home in step 2, each time you repeat pages, etc. steps 1 – 3, the recorded frame is deleted from the newest one. MOBILE (80×72) Clip Motion of up to 2 frames can The number of Clip Motion framesthat you can record on a disc be recorded. This is suitable for use with Image size portable data terminals. NORMAL (160×120) Approx. 560* MOBILE (80×72) Approx. 1430** 64 65 1-15

BBBB Various recording BBBB Various recording

,

Setting the distance Recording images in Adjusting the TipNormally, the camera automatically

to the subject macro exposure adjusts the exposure. If the color of the Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN/ Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN/ (EXPOSURE) image is too dark or bright as illustrated Mode dial: /S/A/SCN/ below, we recommend that you adjust the Normally the focus is automatically The macro recording is used when exposure manually. When recording a adjusted. This function is useful when zooming up a little subject, such as Adjusts the exposure value which is set backlighted subject or a subject in the the auto focus does not work well such flowers, insects. in the automatic adjustment. snow, set it toward +, and when recording as in dark places. a dark subject with fully displayed on the LCD screen, set it toward –. 1 1 Set the exposure13toward + 3221Set the mode dial to , S, A, 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, SCN, or . SCN, or . M, SCN, or . 2 Press the control buttonB2Press . 2 Press FOCUS. ( ) with the menu cleared. The focus is fixed and the 9 The (macro) indicator appears 3 Select the desired exposure Set the exposure (manual focus) indicator appears. on the LCD screen. value with the jog dial. toward – With the zoom set to the W side, Adjust the exposure value while 3 Turn the jog dial to select the you can shoot a subject that is checking the brightness of the desired focus setting. about 3 cm (1 3/16 inch) (MVC- background. You can select values You can select from 15 focus CD200) or 4 cm (1 5/8 inch) ranging from +2.0 EV to -2.0 EV settings (unit: m) including the 9 (MVC-CD300) away from the lens in steps of 1/3 EV. position: surface in macro mode. 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.0, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, and ∞ (infinity) Note

To return to normal If a subject is under extremely bright or dark

recording mode situations, or the flash is used, the exposure

To reactivate auto focusing

Press the control button B ( ) again. adjustment may not be effective. Press FOCUS again and the focal point The indicator disappears. information disappears. Note Notes You cannot record images in macro with the • Focal point information may not LANDSCAPE mode of the SCENE completely show the correct distance. Use SELECTION function. the information as a guide. • The focus preset does not work properly when attaching a conversion lens. • If you shoot a subject within 0.5 m (19 3/4 inches) with the zoom is set to the T side, you may not get a clear focus. In such cases, the focal point information flashes. Press the zoom W button until the indicator stops flashing. 66 67 To shoot in one-push white

Adjusting the white balance mode TipThe image is susceptible to lighting Enjoying picture

balance (WHITE 1 Select [ONE PUSH]. The conditions. The image looks blue under effects (P. EFFECT)

BALANCE) indicator appears. sunlight in the summer, and looks red Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN/

Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN/ 2 Shoot a white object such as paper under mercury lamps. Human eyes can full under the same situation you resolve these problems. However, the You can digitally process images to Normally, the white balance is will shoot. camera cannot resolve the problem by obtain special effect. automatically adjusted (AUTO). When making adjustments. Normally, the3 Press v . camera adjusts it automatically, but, if the you record with the shooting condition The indicator flashes quickly. image appears in strange colors, we fixed or under the specific lighting When the white balance has been recommend that you change the white 1 condition, you can manually adjust the adjusted and stored in the memory, balance mode. white balance. the indicator stops flashing. 3 To reactivate auto adjustment 1 Select [AUTO] with v/V in step 3. 3 Notes 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, 2 • Select [AUTO] when shooting with M, SCN, or . fluorescent lighting. • Press MENU.The indicator means: 2 Slow flashing: white balance is not set or The menu appears. 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, was not able to be set. Select [PFX] (P. EFFECT) with M, SCN, or . Quick flashing: white balance is being b/B, the desired mode with adjusted (after you press v). v/V. 2 Press MENU. Lit steady: white balance has been set. The menu appears. • If the indicator keeps flashing even SOLARIZE when you press v, record in automatic The light contrast is clearer and the 3 Select [WB] (WHITE BAL) white balance mode. picture looks like an illustration. with b/B, the desired setting with v/V. B&W The picture is monochrome (black ONE PUSH ( ) and white). Adjusting the white balance SEPIA depending on the light source The picture is sepia-toned like an AUTO (No indicator) old photograph. Adjusts the white balance NEG.ART automatically The color and brightness of the IN DOOR (n) picture are reversed as in a • Places where the lighting negative. condition changes quickly OFF • Under bright lighting such as Does not use the picture effect photography studios function. • Under sodium or mercury lamps OUT DOOR ( ) To cancel PICTURE EFFECT Recording a sunrise/sunset, night Select [OFF] with v/V in step 3. scene, neon signs, or fireworks 68 69 1-16

BBBB Various recording BBBB Various recording

, Notes

Recording the date • If you select [DATE] in step 3, the date is Using the Spot light-

and time on the still imposed onto the image in the order metering function image (DATE/TIME) selected with “Setting the date and time”(page 14). Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN/ Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN • The date and time are not superimposed Use this function when there is onto Clip Motion images. 5 backlight or when there is strongcontrast between the subject and the 1, 4 background, etc. 2, 3 1 Set the mode dial to SET UP. The setup screen appears. 2 Select [ ] (CAMERA) with v/V, [DATE/TIME] with B/v/V, Press to activate the spot light- then press B. metering function. Position the point you want to record at the spot light- 3 Select the date and time metering cross hair. setting with v/V, then press z. LCD screen DAY & TIME Imposes the date, hour, and minute.

DATE

Imposes the year, month, and day. Spot light- metering OFF cross hair Does not impose the date and time. 4 Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, or SCN. 5 Record the image. The date and time do not appear on the LCD screen during shooting. These appear during playback only. 20017470 71

B Various playback • Triple-image screen Tip

When the triple-image screen is Enlarging a part of the

Playing back three or displayed, pressing MENU opens the still image (Zoom and

nine images at once menu including [PRINT], [PROTECT], trimming) APERTURE VALUE: F2.5 and [DELETE]. For details on items, see Mode dial: SHUTTER SPEED: 1/125 Mode dial: EXPOSURE VALUE: 0.0 pages 77, 78, and 81. To close the menu, press MENU again. The menu disappears You can display multiple images on the 100-0005 20017410:30PM and the recording information is LCD screen at one time using the SINGLE DISPLAY indicated. 1 zoom buttons. The image indicated by the yellow 3 frame in the index screen is displayed in the middle of the41triple-image screen with the recording information. To display 2 the other information, press v/V. The following marks are displayed 1 Set the mode dial to . on each image according to the image type and settings. 2 Display the image to be 1 Set the mode dial to . : Moving image file enlarged.: VOICE mode file 2 Press the zoom W/T buttons : E-mail file 3 Zoom in the image with the repeatedly. : Print mark zoom T button. The LCD screen display changes - : Protect mark as follows: TEXT: TEXT file 4 Press v/V/b/B repeatedly to • Single (single-image) screen TIFF: TIFF file select the desired portion of CLIP: Clip Motion file the image. 1600 (No mark): Normal recording (no v: The image moves downward 1/10 settings) V: The image moves upward b: The image moves rightward

B: The image moves leftward To display the next

100-0001 20017410:30PM FILE BACK/NEXT VOLUME (previous) index screen

W T Press v/V/b/B. To return to the normal size

Press z. • Index (nine-image) screen To return to normal playback (single-image) To record an enlarged image • Press the zoom T button repeatedly. (trimming) • Press z. 1 Press MENU after zooming. 2 Select [TRIMMING] with B, then Note press z. When viewing an image recorded in Clip 3 Select the image size with v/V, SINGLE DISPLAY Motion or TEXT mode on the index screen, then press z.

W T the image may appear different from the The image is recorded and the

actual image. image on the LCD screen returns to the normal size after recording. 72 73 1-17

BBBB Various recording BBBB Various playback

, Notes To cancel the SLIDE SHOW • Zoom scaling is up to 5× regardless of the Playing back the still setting Rotating a still image original image size. images in order Select [CANCEL] with v/V in step 3, (ROTATE) • The quality of enlarged images may be deteriorated. (SLIDE) then press z. Mode dial: • The original data is left even if you enlarge Mode dial: the image. To stop the SLIDE SHOW You can rotate the image recorded in • The enlarged image is recorded as the This function is useful for checking the playback portrait orientation and display it in newest file. recorded images or for presentations, Press , select [EXIT] with , then landscape orientation.z B • If you trim an image, the disc space will be etc. press z. decrease. • If the disc space is not sufficient, you may be unable to trim an image. To skip to the next/previous • Moving images cannot be enlarged. 1 image during the SLIDE • The still images recorded in TEXT mode SHOW 3, 4 can be enlarged, but these images cannot 3, 4 Select b/B at the lower-left on the 2 be trimmed. 2 LCD screen. Note The interval setting time may vary 1 Set the mode dial to , and 1 depending on the image size.Set the mode dial to . display the image to rotate. 2 Press MENU. 2 Press MENU. The menu appears. The menu appears. 3 Select [SLIDE], then press z. 3 Select [ROTATE] with b/B, Set the following items. then press z. INTERVAL 4 Rotate the image clockwise You can select from 1 min (one or counterclockwise , minute), 30 sec (30 seconds), then select [OK] with v/V, 10 sec (10 seconds), or 5 sec then press z. (5 seconds). REPEAT To cancel rotation ON: Plays back images in a Select [CANCEL] with v/V in step 4, continuous loop (The slide show then press z. stops in approximately 20 minutes*). Notes OFF: After all images have been • You cannot rotate protected or played back, the slide show ends. uncompressed images, or images recorded in TEXT mode. ∗ The slide show does not end until all • You may not be able to rotate images the images are played back, even if it recorded with other equipment. takes more than 20 minutes. • Also, when viewing images on a computer, the image rotation information may not be 4 Select [START], then press z. reflected depending on the application The slide show begins. software. • If you rotate an image, the disc space will decrease. • If the disc space is not sufficient, you may not be able to rotate an image. 74 75

B Editing Viewing images on a In index mode TV screen Deleting images

Mode dial: (DELETE) Before connecting your camera, be Mode dial: 1 sure to turn off the TV. Protected images cannot be deleted. 3–5 Set the TV/VIDEO switch to In single-image or triple- 2, 5 “VIDEO”. image mode 1 Set the mode dial to , then display the index screen with 1 the zoom W button. A/V 2 connecting cable 2, 4, 5 2 Press MENU. The menu appears. to A/V OUT (MONO) 3 Select [DELETE] with b/B, jack then press z. 1 Set the mode dial to . 1 Connect the A/V connecting 4 Select [ALL] or [SELECT] cable to the A/V OUT (MONO) 2 In single-image mode: with b/B, then press z. jack of your camera and to Display the image you want to the audio/video input jacks of delete with b/B. the TV. In triple-image mode: If your TV has stereo type input Press the zoom W button twice to jacks, connect the audio plug turn to the triple-image mode. (black) of the A/V connecting Display the image you want to cable to the Lch jack. delete with b/B. 2 Turn on the TV and start playback on your camera. 3 Press MENU. The playback image appears on the The menu appears. TV screen. 4 Select [DELETE] with b/B in single-image mode, or with Notes v/V in triple-image mode, then press z. • You cannot use a TV that has an antenna (aerial) connector only. • When viewing a still image on the TV, the 5 Select [OK] with v/V, then black band may appear around the image. press z. The image (or the middle- positioned image in triple-image mode) is deleted. 76 77 1-18

BBBB Various playback BBBB Editing

, 5 When you select [ALL] Preventing accidental In index mode 5 When you select [ALL] Select [ENTER] with b/B, then press z. erasure (PROTECT) Select [ON] with b/B, then press z. All the unprotected images are Mode dial: All the images in the disc are deleted. 1Protects images against accidental protected. When you select [SELECT] erasure. 3–5 When you select [SELECT]The frame of the selected image The frame of the selected image turns green. In single-image or triple- 2, 5 turns green. 1 Select the image to be deleted image mode 1 Select the image to be protected with v/V/b/B, then press z. with v/V/b/B, then press z. To cancel, press z again. 1 Set the mode dial to , then To cancel, press z again. Repeat this step to select other display the index screen with Repeat this step to select other images. 1 the zoom W button. images. The (delete) indicator 2 The - indicator appears on appears on the selected images. 2 Press MENU. the selected images.2, 4 The menu appears. 3 Select [PROTECT] with b/B, then press z. 1 Set the mode dial to . 4 Select [ALL] or [SELECT] SET MENU TO NEXT with b/B, then press z. SET MENU2 TO NEXTIn single-image mode 2 Press MENU. Display the image you want to 2 Press MENU. 3 Select [OK] with b/B, then protect with b/B. 3 Select [OK] with b/B, then press z. In triple-image mode press z. Press the zoom W button twice to turn to the triple-image mode.

To cancel deleting Display the image you want to To release protection

Select [CANCEL] with b/B in step 4 protect with b/B. If you selected [ALL] in step 4, select or [EXIT] with b/B in step 5, then [OFF] with b/B, then press z. If you press z. 3 Press MENU. selected [SELECT] in step 4, select the The menu appears. Notes image to be unprotected with v/V/b/ • When using a CD-R, even if you delete B, then press z. Repeat this step toSelect [PROTECT] with b/B in images, the disc remaining space does not 4 single-image mode, or with select other images. Press MENU and increase. / in triple-image mode, select [OK] with b/B, then press z.v V • Only when using a CD-RW, the disc then press z. remaining space increases after deleting NotesThe displayed image (or the the last-recorded image if the is indicated on the LCD screen before middle-positioned image in triple- • If you protect an image, the disc space will decrease. Also, if you release protection, deleting. If you modify an image, or open image mode) is protected. The - the disc space will decrease. and close the disc cover, will (protect) indicator appears on the • If the disc space is not sufficient, you may disappear. image. not be able to protect an image. • If the disc space is not sufficient, you may not be able to delete an image. • If the lower four-digit file number of an To release protection image is the same as the number of the Press z again in step 4. The - selected image, that image also will be indicator disappears. deleted. 78 79 Notes To unmark the print mark

Changing the • When you change from a small size to a Selecting still images Press z again in step 4. mark

recorded still image large size, the picture quality deteriorates. to print (PRINT) disappear. size (RESIZE) • The original image is retained even afterresizing. Mode dial: Mode dial: • You cannot change the size of images You can mark a print mark on still In index mode recorded in TEXT mode, moving images, You can change the image size of the uncompressed images, or Clip Motion images recorded with your camera. recorded image. images. This mark is convenient when you • The resized image is recorded as the have images printed at a shop that newest file. conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print11• If you resize an image, the disc space will Order Format) standard. decrease. 3–5, 7 • If the disc space is not sufficient, you may In single-image or triple- 3, 4 not be able to resize an image. image mode 2, 6 1 Set the mode dial to , then 1 display the index screen with 1 Set the mode dial to , then 2 the zoom W button. display the image of which you want to change the size. 2, 4 2 Press MENU. 2 The menu appears.Press MENU. The menu appears. 3 Select [PRINT] with b/B, then press z. 3 Select [RESIZE] with b/B, 1 Set the mode dial to . then press z. 2 4 Select [SELECT] with b/B,In single-image mode then press z. 4 Select the desired size with Display the image you want to When marking the mark, you v/V, then press z. print with b/B. cannot select [ALL]. MVC-CD200: 1600×1200, In triple-image mode The frame of the selected image 1024×768, 640×480 Press the zoom W button twice to turns green. MVC-CD300: 2048×1536, turn to the triple-image mode. 1600×1200, 1280×960, 640×480 Display the image you want to 5 Select the image to be The resized image is recorded. print with b/B. marked with v/V/b/B, then press z. 3 Press MENU. To cancel, press z again.

To cancel changing the size The menu appears. Repeat this step to select other

Select [CANCEL] with v/V in step 4, images. The mark appears on then press . 4 Select [PRINT] with b/B inz the selected image.single-image mode, or with v/V in triple-image mode, then press z. The (print) mark is marked on the displayed image (or the middle-positioned image in triple- image mode). SET MENU TO NEXT 80 81 1-19

BBBB Editing BBBB Editing

, Notes 6 Press MENU. Formatting a CD-RW • When you format, be sure to use a fully The menu appears. charged battery pack or the AC power When deleting all the images in the adaptor as the power source. 7 Select [OK] with b/B, then CD-RW or using the CD-RW • CD-Rs cannot be formatted. press z. formatted with other equipment than • The disc which is formatted using other this camera, format the CD-RW. When equipment than this camera cannot be used you format a CD-RW, all data stored with this camera. Format the disc again

To unmark selected print with this camera.on the disc will be deleted. Check the

marks • It takes about seven minutes to execute thecontents of the disc before formatting. format. Select the image to be unmarked in The initialization is also executed after • About 300 times formatting can be step 5 with v/V/b/B, then press z. the format. available on a CD-RW. • Once you format the CD-RW, protected

To unmark all the print images are also deleted.

marks 1 2Select [ALL] with b/B in step 4, then press z. Select [OFF] with b/B, then 3–5 press z. The marks on all images are unmarked.

To cancel marking the print

mark 1 Insert only the CD-RW you want to format. Select [CANCEL] with b/B in step 4, then press z, or select [EXIT] with b/ 2 Set the mode dial to SET UP.

B in step 7, then press z. The setup screen appears.

Notes • 3 Select [ ] (DISC TOOL) withYou cannot mark moving images, Clip v/V, [FORMAT] with B/v/V, Motion images or images recorded in then press B. TEXT mode. • If you mark an image recorded in TIFF mode with a print mark, only the 4 Select [OK] with v/V, then uncompressed image is printed, and the press z. JPEG image recorded at the same time is “FORMAT PLACE ON LEVEL not printed. SURFACE” appears on the LCD • If you mark an image with a print mark, screen. the disc space will decrease. Also, if you unmark the print mark, the disc space will 5 Select [OK] with v/V, thendecrease. press z. • If the disc space is not sufficient, you may not be able to mark an image with a print mark. To cancel formatting Select [CANCEL] with v/V in step 3, then press z. 82 83

SETUP 1 Changing the setup settings (SET UP) Item Setting Description

Set the mode dial to SET UP. The setup screen appears. You can set up the following FILE NUMBER SERIES Assigns numbers to files in sequence even if items with the control button. the disc is changed. xRESET Resets the file number that starts from 0001

DISC TOOL each time the disc is changed. Item Setting Description CONVERSION ON Set to [ON] when using the VCL-MHG07

FINALIZE OK Finalizes a disc (page 32). LENS (MVC- conversion lens (not supplied). At this time, CD300 only) the zoom function does not work. Also, note CANCEL Cancels the finalization. that the VAD-S70 adaptor ring needed to FORMAT OK Formats a CD-RW (page 82). mount the conversion lens to your camera is not sold in some countries and regions. CANCEL Cancels formatting of the CD-RW. xOFF INITIALIZE OK Initializes a disc (page 18). / xENGLISH Displays the menu items in English. CANCEL Cancels the initialization. LANGUAGE /JPN Displays the menu items in Japanese. UNFINALIZE OK Unfinalizes a CD-RW (page 34). CLOCK SET OK Sets the date and time (page 14). CANCEL Cancels the unfinalization.

CANCEL CAMERA

When [CONVERSION LENS] is set to [ON]:

Item Setting Description • The SCENE SELECTION and zoom functions are not activated.

SCENE xTWILIGHT Selects the SCENE SELECTION mode that • When the mode dial is set to S or M, the iris value can be selected only from F4 or more. SELECTION LANDSCAPE is assigned to the SCN position (page 58). • The focus preset is not activated.• The macro recording is not activated.

PORTRAIT

MOVING xMPEG MOVIE Records the MPEG movie (page 26). SETUP 2 IMAGE CLIP MOTION Records the Clip Motion. Item Setting Description DATE/TIME DAY & TIME Sets whether to insert the date and time into LCD BRIGHT Selects the LCD brightness (page 22). DATE the still image (page 70). BRIGHTNESS xNORMAL xOFF DARK DIGITAL ZOOM xON Uses digital zoom (page 23). LCD BRIGHT Selects the brightness of the LCD backlight. OFF Does not use digital zoom. BACKLIGHT xNORMAL BRACKET STEP ±1.0EV Sets the exposure plus minus value when BEEP SHUTTER Turns on the shutter sound only. (The shutter (MVC-CD300 x±0.7EV recording three images with each exposure sound is heard when you press the shutter only) ±0.3EV value shifted (page 63). button.) RED EYE ON Reduces the red-eye phenomenon (page 24). xON Turns on the beep/shutter sound (when you REDUCTION press the control button/shutter button).xOFF OFF Turns off the beep/shutter sound. AF xON Uses when it is hard to focus on the subject ILLUMINATOR OFF under dark situations (page 25). VIDEO OUT NTSC Sets the video output signal to NTSC mode (e.g., Japan, the USA). PAL Sets the video output signal to PAL mode (e.g., Europe). 84 85 1-20

BBBB Editing BBBB Editing

,

Item Setting Description Additional information Cleaning the camera surface

Clean the camera surface with a soft USB CONNECT PTP Switches the USB mode (page 35). Precautions cloth slightly moistened with water, xNORMAL then wipe the surface dry. Do not use DEMO ON This is activated only when using the AC The set is not disconnected from the any type of solvent such as thinner,x power adaptor. [DEMO] is set to [STBY] at AC power source (mains) as long as it alcohol or benzene as this may damageOFF the factory and the demonstration starts is connected to the wall outlet, even if the finish or the casing. about 10 minutes after you have set the the set itself has been turned off. After using your camera at the mode dial to , S, A, M, or SCN. To seashore or other dusty locations cancel the demonstration, turn off the power. On handling the camera Clean your camera carefully. Otherwise, the salty air may corrode Do not carry the camera by holding the metal fittings or dust may enter the the disc cover inside of your camera, causing a malfunction.

On operating temperature

Your camera is designed for use between the temperatures of 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). Recording in extremely cold or hot places that Do not touch the rotating disc exceed this range is not recommended. This may cause serious injuries.

On pickup lens cleaning On moisture condensation

If the camera is brought directly from a When the pickup lens is dirty and the cold to a warm location, or is placed in camera cannot read any image, clean a very damp room, moisture may the pickup lens using a commercially available blower. condense inside or outside the camera. Should this occur, the camera will not operate properly. Moisture condensation occurs easily when: • The camera is brought from a cold location such as a ski slope into a Pickup warmly heated room. lens • The camera is taken from an air- conditioned room or car interior to the hot outdoors, etc.

On cleaning How to prevent moisture

condensation Cleaning the LCD screen When bringing the camera from a cold Wipe the screen surface with a place to a warm place, seal the camera cleaning cloth (not supplied) or an in a plastic bag and allow it to adapt to LCD cleaning kit (not supplied) to conditions at the new location over a remove fingerprints, dust, etc. period of time (about an hour). 86 87 If moisture condensation occurs • Do not place the unit in locations that Turn off the camera and wait about an On the built-in rechargeableare: lithium battery On discs hour for the moisture to evaporate. — Extremely hot or cold Note that if you attempt to record with — Dusty or dirty Your camera is supplied with a built-in Be sure to use only 8 cm CD-Rs/CD- moisture remaining inside the lens, you RWs. You cannot read or write data on— Very humid rechargeable lithium battery installed will be unable to record clear images. so as to retain the date and time, etc., other type discs that do not correspond— Vibrating regardless of the setting of the POWER to this camera.

On pickup lens switch. The built-in rechargeableOn battery pack lithium battery is always charged as On cleaning

Do not touch the pickup lens inside the long as you are using your camera. The• Use only the specified charger with disc cover. And do not open the disc battery, however, will get discharged • Do not clean a disc using a cleanerthe charging function. cover except when inserting or gradually if you do not use your before recording. Use a removing a disc to keep dust out. • To prevent accident from a short camera. It will be completely commercially available blower to circuit, do not allow metal objects to discharged in about one month if you remove dust. come into contact with the battery do not use your camera at all. Even if • If fingerprints, dust, drop of water, or

On AC power adaptor terminals. the built-in rechargeable lithium oil makes the recordable side (the

• Keep the battery pack away from fire. battery is not charged, it will not affect • Unplug the unit from the wall outlet other side of the printed side) of a• Never expose the battery pack to the camera operation. To retain the (mains) when you are not using the disc dirty, the camera may nottemperatures above 60°C (140°F), date and time, etc., charge the battery if unit for a long time. To disconnect properly record an image on the disc.such as in a car parked in the sun or the battery is discharged. the power cord (mains lead), pull it You should handle a disc with a lot ofunder direct sunlight. out by the plug. Never pull the power Charging the built-in rechargeable care. cord (mains lead) itself. • Keep the battery pack dry. lithium battery: • If a disc does become dirty, wipe it in • Do not operate the unit with a • Do not expose the battery pack to any • Connect your camera to house a straight line from center to edge damaged cord (mains lead) or if the mechanical shock. current (mains) using the AC power with a soft dry cloth or a soft cloth unit has been dropped or damaged. • Do not disassemble nor modify the adaptor supplied with your camera, lightly moistened with a mild battery pack. and leave your camera with the detergent solution. You can use a• Do not bend the power cord (mains • Attach the battery pack to the camera power turned off for more than 24 commercially available CD cleaner.lead) forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage the cord securely. hours. (mains lead) and may cause fire or • Charging while some capacity • Or install the fully charged battery electrical shock. remains does not affect the original pack in your camera, and leave your • Prevent metallic objects from coming battery capacity. camera with the power turned off for into contact with the metal parts of more than 24 hours. the connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the If any problem occurs, unplug your unit may be damaged. camera and contact your nearest Sony • Always keep metal contacts clean. dealer. • Do not disassemble the unit. • Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit. • While the unit is in use, particularly • Do not use any solvent (benzine, during charging, keep it away from thinner, static protection product, AM receivers and video equipment. record cleaner, etc.) to clean a disc. AM receivers and video equipment Notes disturb AM reception and video • Do not remove the disc while reading or operation. writing data. • The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction. 88 89 1-21

Additional information Additional information

, • Data may be damaged if: 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Use a Effective use of the battery pack — You remove the disc or turn off the commercially available AC plug About “InfoLITHIUM” • Battery performance decreases in power while reading or writing data. adaptor [a], if necessary, depending on low-temperature surroundings. So, — You use the camera in a location subject battery packthe design of the wall outlet (mains) the time that the battery pack can be to the effects of static electricity or [b]. What is the “InfoLITHIUM” battery used is shorter in cold places. Wenoise. • Do not attach any material on the surface pack? recommend the following to use the of a disc. This causes a nonuniform The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a battery pack longer: rotating speed and this may cause a AC-L10A/L10B/L10C lithium-ion battery pack that has — Put the battery pack in a pocket malfunction of the camera. functions for communicating close to your body to warm it up, • You can write only on the label surface of a information related to operating and insert it in your camera disc. When you write, use only a felt-tip conditions between your camera and immediately before you start marker and do not touch it until it is in dry the AC power adaptor. taking shots. state, and do not heat it. Do not use a Watching the playback picture on The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack sharp-pointed tool, such as a ballpoint pen. TV • Frequently operating the zoom wearscalculates the power consumption • Hold a disc at the edges while pressing the If you want to view the playback out the battery pack faster. center hole lightly. Do not touch the according to the operating conditionspicture on a TV, you need a TV having • Be certain to turn the POWER switch recordable side (the other side of the of your camera, and displays thea video input jack and a video to off when not taking shots or printed side) of a disc. remaining battery time in minutes.connecting cable. playing back on your camera. The color system of the TV must be Charging the battery pack • We recommend having spare the same as that of your digital still • Be sure to charge the battery pack batteries handy for two or three times camera. Check the following list: before you start using your camera. the expected shooting time, and make • We recommend charging the battery a trial shots before taking the actual NTSC system pack in an ambient temperature of shots. Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) • Do not expose the battery pack to Central America, Chile, Columbia, until the /CHG lamp goes out, water. The battery pack is not water- Ecuador, Jamaica, Japan, Korea, indicating that the battery pack is resistant. Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the • When you carry or store a disc, put it in its fully charged. If you charge thePhilippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc. Remaining battery time indicator case. battery pack outside of this • If the power goes off although the • Do not strike, bend or drop a disc, or rub PAL system temperature range, you may not be battery remaining indicator indicates the edge of a disc. Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, able to efficiently charge the battery • Do not store a disc in the following that the battery pack has enoughDenmark, Finland, Germany, Great pack. locations: power to operate, charge the batteryBritain, Holland, Italy, Kuwait, • After charging is completed, either —In dusty or dirty places pack fully again so that the indicationMalaysia, New Zealand, Norway, disconnect the AC power adaptor —Under direct sunlight on the battery remaining indicator is —Near heaters Portugal, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, from the DC IN jack on your camera correct. Note, however, that the —In dump places Switzerland, Thailand, etc. or remove the battery pack. correct battery indication sometimes • If you play back the disc on which any PAL-M system will not be restored if it is used in image has not been recorded using a CD- Brazil high temperatures for a long time orROM drive, the CD-ROM drive may left in a fully charged state, or the malfunction or the disc may be scratched. PAL-N system battery pack is frequently used. Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay Regard the remaining battery time SECAM system indication as the approximate

Using your camera Bulgaria, Czech Republic, France, shooting time.

abroad Guiana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Poland, Russia, Slovak Republic, Power sources Ukraine, etc. You can use your camera in any country or area with the supplied battery charger within 100 V to 90 91 • The E mark indicating there is little remaining battery time sometimes Troubleshooting flashes depending on the operating conditions or ambient temperature If you experience trouble with your camera, first check the following items. Should and environment even if the your camera still not operate properly after you have made these checks, press the remaining battery time is 5 to 10 reset button located on the bottom. (If you press the reset button, the date and time minutes. setting is cleared.) Should your camera still not operate properly, consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If code displays (C:ss:ss) How to store the battery pack appear on the LCD screen, the self-diagnosis display function is working • Even if the battery pack is not used (page 102). for a long time, store it in a dry, cool place after fully charging it once per year and then using the battery pack Symptom Cause and/or Solution up on your camera. This is to maintain the battery pack’s functions. Your camera does not • You are not using an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. • To use the battery pack up on your work. tUse an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (page 9). camera, leave the POWER switch to • The disc is not inserted properly. on in mode until the power goes tEject the disc, and insert it again (page 16). off without a disc inserted. • The battery level is too low. (The E indicator appears.) Battery life • The battery life is limited. Battery tCharge the battery pack fully (page 10). capacity decreases little by little as • The AC power adaptor is not connected securely. you use it more and more, and as tConnect it securely to the DC IN jack and a wall time passes. When the battery outlet (mains) (page 10, 13). operating time is shortened • The malfunction occurs inside the camera. considerably, a probable cause is that tTurn off the power, and turn on after one the battery pack has reached the end minute, then check that the camera works of its life. Please buy a new battery properly. pack. Your camera cannot • The mode dial is set to or SET UP. • The battery life varies according to record images. tSet it to , S, A, M, SCN, or (pages 20, how it is stored and operating 26). conditions and environment for each battery pack. • No disc is inserted into your camera. tInsert a disc (page 16). • The disc has not been initialized. tInitialize the disc (page 18). 92 93 1-22

Additional information Additional information

,

Symptom Cause and/or Solution Symptom Cause and/or Solution

The picture is out of focus. • Your camera is not in macro recording mode when The flash does not work. • The flash is set to . you shoot a subject that is about 3 to 50 cm tSet the flash to (no indication) or (page 24). (1 3/16 to 19 3/4 inches) (MVC-CD200) or about 4 • The mode dial is set to , SET UP, or to 50 cm (1 5/8 to 19 3/4 inches) (MVC-CD300) (MPEG MOVIE). away from the lens. tSet it to , S, A, M, SCN, or (CLIP tSet the macro recording mode (page 66). MOTION). tPress the zoom W button repeatedly. • The camera is in one of the following SCENE • The LANDSCAPE mode of the SCENE SELECTION modes: TWILIGHT or SELECTION function is selected. LANDSCAPE. tCancel the function. tCancel the SCENE SELECTION function or set • The focus preset is selected. the flash to (page 24, 58). tCancel the function. • [MODE] (REC MODE) is set to [EXP BRKTG] or • [CONVERSION LENS] is set to [ON] in the setup [BURST] (MVC-CD300 only) in the menu settings (MVC-CD300 only). settings. tSet it to [OFF] (page 85). tSet it to the other modes. The resizing function does • You cannot resize moving images, text images, Clip The date and time are • The date and time are not set correctly. not work. Motion images, and uncompressed images. recorded incorrectly. tSet the correct date and time (page 14). You cannot display a print • You cannot display print marks on moving images, Vertical streaks appear • This is called the smear phenomenon. This is not a mark. text images and Clip Motion images. when you are shooting a malfunction. very bright subject. The picture is noisy. • Your camera is placed near a TV or other tSet the exposure toward – (page 67). equipment that uses strong magnets. The zoom does not work. • [CONVERSION LENS] is set to [ON] in the setup tMove your camera away from the TV, etc. (MVC-CD300 only) settings. The picture is too dark. • You are shooting a subject with a light source tSet it to [OFF] (page 85). behind the subject. • The zoom cannot be used when recording a moving tAdjust the exposure (page 67). image with [MOVING IMAGE] set to [MPEG • The brightness of the LCD screen is too low. MOVIE]. tAdjust the brightness of the LCD screen Digital zoom does not • The digital zoom cannot be used when recording a (page 22). function. moving image with [MOVING IMAGE] set to [MPEG MOVIE]. • [DIGITAL ZOOM] is set to [OFF]. tSet [DIGITAL ZOOM] to [ON] in the menu settings (page 23). The image is in • You shot the image in TEXT mode. monochrome. tCancel the TEXT mode (page 61). • [PFX] (P. EFFECT) is set to [B&W] in the menu settings. tCancel the B&W mode (page 69). 94 95

Symptom Cause and/or Solution Symptom Cause and/or Solution

The image cannot be • The disc has not been finalized. The TEXT mode • The subject is not under even lighting situations. played back on the CD- tFinalize the disc (page 32). recording cannot be tChange lighting. ROM drive of your • An error occurs during recording by vibration. properly done. • The mode dial is set to S, A, M, or SCN. computer. tPossibly, you may be able to play back images if tSet it to . you connect the camera to your computer with Your computer does not • The battery level is low. the USB cable. recognize your camera. tUse the AC power adaptor (page 13). • The CD-ROM drive does not correspond to the packet-write system or does not conform to the • The camera is turned off. MultiRead type. tTurn on the camera. tConsult the computer or the CD-ROM drive • The USB cable is not connected firmly. manufacturer. tDisconnect the USB cable, and connect it again • Causes not described above are occurred. firmly. Make sure that “USB MODE” is Consult the computer or software manufacturer. displayed on the LCD screen (page 38).t • The USB connectors on your computer are Your camera cannot delete • The disc is not initialized. connected to other equipment besides the keyboard, an image. tInitialize the disc (page 18). the mouse, and your camera. • The disc space is not sufficient. tDisconnect the USB cables except for the ones tThis is not a malfunction. connected to the keyboard, the mouse, and your • The image is protected. camera. tCancel the protection (page 78). • The USB driver is not installed. The power turns off • If you do not operate the camera for about three tInstall the USB driver (page 38). suddenly. minutes while the power is on, the camera turns off • [USB CONNECT] is set to [PTP] in the setup automatically to prevent wearing down the battery settings. pack. tSet it to [NORMAL] (page 86). tTurn on the camera. • Since the camera is connected to a computer with • The battery pack is discharged. the USB cable before installing the USB driver, the Replace it with a fully charged battery pack. drive is not recognized by the computer.t tDelete the drive which is not recognized, then The image does not • The [VIDEO OUT] setting of your camera is install the USB driver. For details, see the appear on the TV screen. incorrect. procedure below. tChange the setting (page 85). The SLIDE SHOW • The SLIDE SHOW function stops after about Reinstall the USB driver when using Windows 98, Windows function stops 20 minutes. 98SE, Windows Me and Windows 2000 Professional automatically. tTo continue the slide show, select [START] Perform all steps without skipping. again (page 74). 1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load. The macro function does • [SCENE SELECTION] is set to [LANDSCAPE] in not work. the setup settings. 2 Connect the USB jack on the camera and the computer with the supplied USB cable. tCancel the SCENE SELECTION function (page 58). 3 Insert a disc. • [CONVERSION LENS] is set to [ON] in the setup settings (MVC-CD300 only). 4 Connect the AC power adaptor to your camera and then to a wall Set it to [OFF] (page 85). outlet (mains), and turn on the power of your camera.t 96 97 1-23

Additional information Additional information

, 5 Open “Device Manager” on Windows. Symptom Cause and/or Solution For Windows 98, Windows 98SE and Windows Me users: The indication of the • You are using the camera for many hours under 1 Open [Control Panel] from [ My Computer], then double-click [System]. battery remaining time is extremely hot or cold temperatures. not proper, or the power is • The battery pack is dead. 2 “System properties” is displayed. Click the [Device Manager] tab located at immediately turned off tReplace the battery pack with a new one the top. even if the battery (page 9). remaining indicator 3 Click [ CD Mavica] in [ Other devices], then click the [Delete (E)] indicates that the battery • The battery level is too low. button located at the lower-right corner. level is sufficient. tInstall the fully charged battery pack (page 9, 10). For Windows 2000 Professional users: • A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery * Log in with the permission of administrator. time. 1 Open [Control Panel] from [ My Computer], then double-click [System]. tCharge the battery pack fully (page 10). The /CHG lamp flashes • A malfunction has occurred in the battery pack. 2 “System properties” is displayed. Click the [Hardware] tab located at the top, when charging a battery tContact your Sony dealer or local authorized then click the [Device Manager (D)] button. pack. Sony service facility. 3 Click [View] in [Device Manager], then click [Devices by type (E)]. The /CHG lamp does • The AC power adaptor is not connected. not light up when charging tConnect the power cord firmly to a wall outlet 4 Right-click [ CD Mavica] in [ Other devices], then click [Delete (E)]. a battery pack. (mains) (page 10). 6 After the message appears to verify that you delete the device • The battery pack is not installed properly. manager, click “OK.” tInstall it properly (page 9). • Charging of the battery pack is complete. 7 Turn off the camera, disconnect the USB cable, and restart the computer. No function works though • — the power is on. tRemove the battery pack, then install it again 8 Install the USB driver in the supplied CD-ROM to the computer after about one minute. If the function still do following the procedure on page 38. not work, press the reset button located on the bottom using a sharp-pointed object. (If you press the reset button, the date and time setting is cleared.)

Battery packs Symptom Cause and/or Solution

The battery pack cannot • The power of the camera is turned on. be charged. tTurn off the power of the camera (page 10). The battery life is short. • You are recording/playing back images under extremely cold temperatures. • The battery pack is not charged enough. tCharge the battery pack fully. • The battery pack is dead. tReplace the battery pack with a new one. 98 99

Warning and notice messages Message Meaning E The battery level is too low.

Various messages appear on the LCD screen. Check the corresponding descriptions CAN NOT UNFINALIZE A CD-R or the disc that is not finalized is in the following list. inserted.

Message Meaning CAN NOT FORMAT A CD-R is inserted.

FORMAT ERROR The disc that is formatted using other LENS CAP ATTACHED The lens cap is attached. equipment than this camera is inserted. COVER OPEN The disc cover is opened. TURN THE POWER OFF AND ON A malfunction occurs on the lens (MVC- NO DISC No disc is inserted. AGAIN CD300 only). DRIVE ERROR There is trouble with the disc drive or the The amount of light is not sufficient or camera. the shutter speed is too slow. DISC ERROR An unusable disc is inserted or there is trouble with the disc. DEW ERROR A moisture condensation has occurred inside the camera. DISC PROTECT The disc was protected with a computer. DIRECTORY ERROR The same directory exists. NOT ENOUGH DISC SPACE The remaining capacity of the disc is not enough to operate other than executing the finalization. NOT INITIALIZED Since the disc has not been initialized, the camera cannot record any image on the disc. ALREADY INITIALIZED It is not necessary to execute the initialization, the disc was initialized. ALREADY FINALIZED It is not necessary to execute the finalization, the disc was finalized. NO FILE No image is recorded on the disc. FILE ERROR Trouble has occurred during playback. IMAGE SIZE OVER You tried to play back images with an image size larger than the maximum playback size of this camera. INVALID OPERATION You try to play back the image recorded with other equipment. FILE PROTECT The image is protected. For "InfoLITHIUM" BATTERY The battery is not the “InfoLITHIUM” ONLY type. NOT ENOUGH BATTERY The battery level is too low to execute the initialization or finalization. 100 101 1-24

Additional information Additional information

,

Self-diagnosis display LCD screen indicators

Your camera has a self-diagnosis display. This function displays the camera condition on the The indicators during recording LCD screen with a combination of a letter and four digits of numbers. If this appears, check the following code chart. The code informs you of the 1 qd camera’s current condition. The last two digits 2 qf (indicated by ss) will differ depending on the state of the camera. 3 qg 4 qh Self-diagnosis display 5 qj120min AE-L • 640

FINE

C: ss: ss 6 4000 qk You can repair the camera DATE7 ISO400 5.8m yourself. SOLARIZE +2.0EV qlF4.3 • E: ss: ss 8 2000 w; Contact your Sony dealer or local 9 wa authorized Sony service facility. 0 ws qa

Code Cause and/or Corrective Action WHITE BAL ISO MODE wd

qs C:32:ss • There is trouble with the disc drive. tTurn the power off and on again. A Battery remaining indicator O Image size indicator C:13:ss • A disc not compatible with this camera B Flash level indicator/Flash P Image quality indicator is inserted or the data is broken. mode indicator Change the disc. (page 16) Q SCENE SELECTION indicatort C Red-eye reduction indicator E:61:ss • A camera malfunction that you cannot R Remaining disc capacity E:91:ss repair has occurred. D White balance indicator indicator tContact your Sony dealer or local E DATE indicator S Remaining number of authorized Sony service facility and recordable images/Recording inform them of the 5-digit F AF illuminator indicator time indicator/Self-diagnosis indication. (example: E:61:10) G ISO number indicator function indicator If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actionsaHSharpness indicator T Manual adjustment indicators few times when C:ss:ss is indicated, contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. I Picture effect indicator U Self-timer indicator J AF frame V Light amount warning indicator K Spot light-metering cross hair W Jog dial indicator L Menu Pressing MENU switches the menu on/off. M AE/AF lock indicator N Recording mode/Clip Motion indicator 102 105

The indicators during still image playback The indicators during moving image playback

1122334120min 160 4 120min 1600 2/5 11/12 5 00:01 5 x1.36760MOV00002 20017410:30PM 8100-0011 20017410:30PM STOP REV/CUE VOLUME qa9ARecording mode/Clip Motion A Recording mode indicator indicator B Image size indicator B Image size indicator C Image number/number of C Image number stored images on a disc D Number of stored images onaDRemaining disc capacity disc indicator E Remaining disc capacity E Time counter indicator F Playback image F Print mark indicator G Playback bar G Protect indicator H Menu and guide menu H Zoom scaling indicator I Playback/pause indicator I Disc space recoverable B is displayed during playback, indicator and x during stop. J Recording date of the playback image* K File name* ∗ When the menu is displayed, this indicator disappears from the screen. 106 107 1-25E

Additional information Additional information

,

MVC-CD200/CD300 SECTION 2 DISASSEMBLY The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.

2-1. LCD section (PK-58 board) PK-58 board service position 2-2. Cabinet (front) section 2-3. Lens section (CD-333/334 board) 2-4. Cabinet (front) assembly (TK-61 board), Control switch block (RL-503) CD-333/334, TK-61 boards service position 2-5. Battery holder (JK-208 board) SY-67, JK-208, CD-333/334 boards and 2-6. SY-67 board Camera section check service position 2-7. Stroboscope section (Flash unit) Flash unit service position FS-83 board and 2-8. Base unit (DDX-G2100 complete assembly) Base unit (DDX-G2100 complete assembly) check service position 2-9. Lid CD section 2-16. Disassembling procedure of MD-083 board 2-10. Function button (FS-83 board) MD-083 board service position 2-11. Solenoid plunger (Door lock/Stroboscope), Refer to level 3 CD lock slider 2-12. Control switch block (ZK-503), Strap shaft 2-13. Mode knob, Power spring [CONNECTION OF THE EQUIPMENT] Tapping CN302 screw (DIA1.7 × 5) 1 AC power adaptor AC IN CPC-9 jig 18 1 (J-6082-393-C) Monitor TV 18 Adjustment remote CPC lid commander (RM-95) Connect the remote commander to either one. 2-1

MVC-CD200/CD300

, NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given. 2-1. LCD SECTION (PK-58 BOARD) 3 Two precision screws (DIA 1.7 × 4) 5 PK-58 board Upper stay assembly Remove the CD rear lid in the direction of the arrow A. -58 Remove the PK-58 PK board in the direction B of the arrow B.

A

-58

PK

4 Precision screw (DIA 1.7 × 4) 3 Four precision screws (DIA 1.7 × 4) 1 Liquid crystal indicator module (24P) 1 Two precision screws (DIA 1.7 × 4) 2 Back light (10P) 2 Flexible cover (CD) 4 Precision screw (DIA 1.7 × 5) 1 Two precision screws (DIA 1.7 × 4) 2 Two precision screws (DIA 1.7 × 4) 6 CD rear 8 lid-5 3 BL retainer plate

PK

4 Back light 5 CPC lid Cold cathode fluorescent tube 5 Liquid crystal indicator module 6 Solar window [PK-58 BOARD SERVICE POSITION] Setup before LCD section check To facilitate the checks, set the “Internal color bar signal” mode using the adjustment remote control before LCD section check. PK-58 board Setting the “Internal color bar signal” mode. 1) Set the mode dial to “ ”. 2) Select page: 4, address: F1, and set data: 04. Note: If “CLOCK SET” display appered in the screen, cancel it. 18 Exiting the “Internal color bar signal” mode. 1) Select page: 4, address: F1, and set data: 00. -58

PK

CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C) AC power adaptor AC IN Adjustment remote Liquid crystal Back light commander ( -95) indicator module Cold cathode fluorescent tube 2-2, 2-2. CABINET (FRONT) SECTION 9 Screw (M 2 × 4), 3 Two screws lock ace, P2 (M 2 × 3.5) 6 Screw (M 2 × 4), lock ace, P2 4 Accessory shoe 2 Special (step) screw (M 2) qf FP-369 flexible board (5P) qg Control switch block S (RL-503) (6P) Y-67 7 Screw (M 2 × 4), 1 Open the lid lock ace, P2 CD section JK-208 Cabinet (front) section, 5 Screw (M 2 × 4),qh Lens cabinet section, lock ace, P2 Lens section qs FP-364 flexible board (70P) qa BIB retainer qd Microphone (2P) 8 Open the BT lid 0 Two screws (M 2 × 4), lock ace, P2 (CD200) 4 Two screws (M 2 × 4), lock ace, P2 5 Lens section 3 Ornamental ring 6 Cabinet (front) section (CD300) A 2 Remove the lens cabinet assembly in the direction of the arrow A. 1 Screw (M 2 × 4), lock ace, P2 4 Three screws (M 2 × 4), lock ace, P2 3 Ornamental ring 5 Lens 1 Three screws (M 1.7 × 7) section 4 Lens cabinet (H) 6 Cabinet (front) section

B

2 Remove the lens cabinet assembly in the direction of the arrow B. 3 LC switch 2 Filter ring 1 Screw (M 2 × 4), lock ace, P2 2-3, 2-3. LENS SECTION (CD-333/334 BOARD) (CD200) 5 Four screws 5 CCD fitting adaptor (CL) 4 Four claws 6 Optical filter block 7 Seal rubber (CL) 8 Remove the solderings 6 Zoom motor unit 0 CCD heat sink (M) 8 Zoom qa CD-333 board lens 7 Focus motor unit 4 Remove the solderings 1 Spacer 1 Precision 33 screw 2 Flexible board, -3 (DIA 1.7 × 4) (from lens section) CD (26P) 3 Two tapping 9 CCD block screws (B 1.7 × 7.5 ) assembly 3 Lens frame (M) 2 Precision screw (DIA 1.7 × 4) (CD300) 6 Optical filter block 7 Seal rubber (N) 9 CCD block assembly 8 Remove the solderings 2 Lens frame (H) 3 Tapping screw (B 1.7 × 3.5) 3 Lens assembly qa CD-334 board 2 Flexible board, (from lens section) (6P)

CD

- 1 Flexible board, (from lens section) 4 Three tapping (16P) 5 screws (B 1.7 × 6) 1 Three screws (M 1.7 × 4), 0 CCD heat sink (H) lock ace, p2 2-4, 2-4. CABINET (FRONT) ASSEMBLY (TK-61 BOARD),

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-503)

1 Two screws (M 1.7 × 2), lock ace, P2 2 Two claws 6 Microphone holder assembly 1 Two precision 7 Microphone cushion screws (DIA 1.7 × 4) 8 Microphone 9 Retainer sheet metal 4 Microphone 4 FP-370 flexible 5 Tape (A) sheet board (5P), LED 5 Two tapping screws (B 1.7 × 3.5) 2 LED cap 3 Rear sheet 3 Two precision metal (upper) screws 6 TK-61 board, (DIA 1.7 × 4) FP-369 flexible 2 Control switch board block (RL-503) 1 Two precision screws (DIA 1.7 × 4) 3 Cabinet (front) assembly [CD-333/334, TK-61 BOARDS SERVICE POSITION] Control switch block (RL-503) (6P) AC power adaptor AC IN FP-369 flexible SY board (5P) -67 FP-364 flexible 1 CPC-9 jig J board (70P) K2 - (J-6082-393-C)08 18 TK-61 board Adjustment remote commander (RM-95) (CD300) CD-334 board (CD200) CD-333 board

CD

- 334 -CD Lens block assembly Lens block assembly 2-5, 2-5. BATTERY HOLDER (JK-208 BOARD)

S-

5 Battery terminal F board (3P) 4 Remove the BT holder assembly in the direction of the arrow A.

REMOVING THE BATTERY HOLDER

A SY-67 8 Battery holder 6 BT holder assembly 3 BT lid retainer 7 Battery spring 3 Precision screw 6 Battery terminal (DIA 1.7 × 4) board 1 Open the BT lid 2 Screw (M 2 × 4), lock ace, P2 JK-208 1 Two tapping screws 7 Two precision (CD300) (1.7 × 3) screws 2 BT lid 5 Two claws (DIA 1.7 × 4) 8 JK-208 board, FP-361 flexible board (CD200) 4 BT sheet 8 SJ sheet 0 JK-208 board, J FP-361 flexible K-208 board 9 JK sheet 2-6. SY-67 BOARD 6 Harness 7 Precision screw (from flash unit 8P) (DIA 1.7 × 4) 8 Four Tape (A) When attaching the connector, route A claws the harnesses through the notch as B shown while taking care so the the harness must not be caught or pinched. M Tape (Z)D 08 -3C2Tape (A)ACB3Tape (Z)SY-67 JK-208 4 Harness (FS-139) (2P) (strobe plunger) 5 Harness (FS-140) (2P) 0 SY-67 board, JK-208 board, (dew sensor) 1 Harness retainer FP-361 flexible board, FP-364 flexible board 9 Remove the connector [SY-67, JK-208, CD-333/334 BOARDS AND CAMERA SECTION CHECK SERVICE POSITION] (CD300) Control switch block CD-334 board (RL-503) (6P) SY-67 board AC power - JK-208 board, adaptor AC IN CD4 FP-361 flexible 33 board - M Lens block assembly SY D - 7 0 - JK 6 83 08 1 CPC-9 jig (CD200) 2 (J-6082-393-C) CD-333 board 18 Harness (FS-140) Adjustment remote (2P) (dew sensor) - commander (RM-95)

CD

333 FP-364 flexible Extension cable board (70P) (J-6082-487-A) (50P) Lens block assembly When using the CD-R/RW drive unit. When using the CD-R/RW drive unit. press S101 and S103. the dew sensor must be connected. 2-6, 2-7. STROBOSCOPE SECTION (FLASH UNIT) Note: The charging capacitor is charged to the maximum of 300V. There is a danger of electric shock due to the high voltage when the capacitor is touched by bare hand. Discharge the voltage remained in the capacitor, referring to the Service Note (See page 5). 3 Discharging the capacitor Capacitor cap 4 Two precision Short jig screws 6 Stroboscope (DIA 1.7 × 4) cover Capacitor 3 Stroboscope 7 Flash unit base 5 Stroboscope 4 Sheet (UW) case assembly 2 ST-POP-UP 1 Capacitor cap spring 5 Control switch block (ZK-503) (14P) 1 ST sensor lever 2 Capacitor - SY MD K- 7 08 - J 6

A

2 Remove the stroboscope section in the direction of the arrow A. 1 Precision screw (DIA 1.7 × 4) - M SY D- K- 67 08J 38 [FLASH UNIT SERVICE POSITION] AC power AC IN adaptor (CD300) Control switch block CD-334 board (RL-503) (6P) Flash unit Stroboscope case assembly

CD

- 334 Stroboscope base, ST sensor lever, ST-POP-UP spring Lens block assembly Control switch block (ZK-503) (14P) (CD200) CD-333 board - MSY D- K-J 67 083 1 CPC-9 jig 082 (J-6082-393-C) - 18

CD

333 Adjustment remote FP-364 flexible commander (RM-95) board (70P) Lens block assembly 2-7, 2-8. BASE UNIT (DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY)

Precautions during handling 7 Remove the DDX-G2100 complete

• Do not turn the side of the optical assembly in the direction of the arrow. lens downward. 1 Harness (FS-138) (2P) • Hold the frame. (door look plunger) • Do not touch the optical lens surface. Y- - S JK 678 5 Two precision MD screws 08 -3 (DIA 1.7 × 4)

M

0 D8 -3 3 Harness (SF-81) 4 Nut plate (side) 9 MD heat sink, MD sheet 6 Precision 8 Precision screw screw 2 Two precision (DIA 1.7 × 4) (DIA 1.7 × 4) screws (DIA 1.7 × 4) [FS-83 BOARD AND BASE UNIT (DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY)

CHECK SERVICE POSITION]

Control switch block (CD300) (RL-503) (6P) CD-334 board SY-67 board FS-83 board JK-208 board, AC power - adaptor AC IN CD FP-361 flexible 334 board - Lens block assembly SY F- S- JK8 67 (CD200) 1 CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C) CD-333 board 18 Harness (FS-140) Adjustment remote - (2P) (dew sensor)D commander (RM-95)C 333 FP-364 flexible board (70P) M0 D8 -3 DDX-G2100 complete Lens block assembly assembly Extension cable (J-6082-487-A) (50P) When using the CD-R/RW When using the CD-R/RW drive unit. drive unit. press S101 and S103. the dew sensor must be connected. 2-8, 2-9. LID CD SECTION Remove the PRE open spring in the direction of the arrow FC. S-83

SY

- 67 1 Open the lid CD section

C

3 PRE A open spring FS- 2 Remove the Parallel pin (DIA 3) 83 in the direction of the arrow A. -

SY

2 Parallel 2 Remove the lid CD section in pin cover 5 FP-363 flexible the direction of the arrow B. board (33P) 1 Two screws (M 1.7 × 3), P2 1 Precision screw (DIA 1.7 × 4)

B

4 Flexible cover (CD) 3 Two precision FS-8 screws - 3 (DIA 1.7 × Y 4) S 2-10.FUNCTION BUTTON (FS-83 BOARD) 2 Dowel 8 Speaker 5 Speaker (2P) 4 Control switch block retainer 9 Speaker 8 Harness (ZK-503) (14P) 7 Precision (FS-136) (14P) screw (DIA 1.7 × 4)

B

6 FP-363 flexible board (33P) A

FS

B -83 6 DC-IN connector (3P) 4 FP-362 flexible board (11P) 7 FP-362 flexible A board (11P) SY 5 Harness -67 Three (FS-136) (14P)1 precision 3 Remove the FS-83 board 2 FP-361 flexible screws in the direction of the arrow. board (27P) (DIA 1.7 × 4) 9 SY-67 board JK-20 3 JK-208 board8 1 FP-364 flexible board (70P) 3 Function button2Fbutton spring 1 Special head screw (M 1.7 × 3) 2-9, 2-11.SOLENOID PLUNGER (DOOR LOCK/STROBOSCOPE), CD LOCK SLIDER 1 CD lock lever spring 2 CD lock lever 2 Two precision screws 3 Parallel pin (DIA 1.7 × 4) (DIA 1.6 × 6) 1 CD opener spring 3 Solenoid cover 1 Solenoid plunger (door lock), Harness (FS-138) # 2 CD opener assembly 2 Four precision screws (DIA 1.7 × 4) 3 ST lock cover 4 Solenoid plunger (stroboscope), Harness (FS-139) Spring # 1 Remove the CD lock spring in the direction of the arrow. When attaching the solenoid plunger, route the harnesses through the notch as shown while taking care so that the harness must not be caught or pinched. 2 Parallel pin 3 CD lock slider 1 CD lock spring 4 FP-248 flexible board (dew sensor) , Harness (FS-140) 2-10, 2-12.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (ZK-503), STRAP SHAFT Remove the PO spring stay in 1 Open the lid the direction of the arrow A. CD section FS-83 FS-83 A PRE open spring 3 PO spring stay 2 Two screws (DIA 1.7 × 5.5) Discharging the capacitor Capacitor cap Short jig

PRECAUTION DURING INSTALLATION

Mode knob retainer "S" position Capacitor set in live A Control switch 1 Capacitor block (ZK-503) s A FS-83 3 Dowel 4 Control switch block (ZK-503) 5 Claw 2 Two precision screws 6 Capacitor (DIA 1.7 × 4) cap 3 Strap shaft 2 Strap sheet metal (R) FS-83 1 Precision screw (DIA 1.7 × 4) 2-11, 2-13.MODE KNOB, POWER SPRING "S" position set in live A When attaching it, coat the27Mode knob hatched portion with grease. s 6 Dial base

A

5 Click plate Click plate 4 Three EG grip Rear view screws (M 1.4 × 2.5) Note: Perform the running-in rotation of the click plate several times. 3 Mode knob retainer 1 Special head screw (M 1.7 × 3) 8 Friction spring 9 Slider ring 0 Power knob Rear view qa Power spring 2-12, 2-14.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION SY-67 LD, PEARL, VIDEO OUT, SH, 16M FLASH MEMORY, 64M SDRAM, CLK GEN, CW, HI CONTROL, AUDIO PROCESS, DC/DC CONVERTER, FLASH UNIT TK-61 (LENS CAP DETECT) CD-334 (CD300) (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER) MD-083 CD-RF PROCESS, SERVO, CD, DSP, CD-R/RW GA, MD SYSTEM CONTROL, EFM/ENC CONTROL PK-58 (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT) FS-83 (CHARGER) JK-208 (USB INTERFACE) CD-333 (CD200) (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER) 2-13, 2-15.FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION The flexible boards contained in the mechanism deck and that in the zoom lens are not shown. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (ZK-503) FP-362 FP-248 FP-370 FP-369 CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-503) FP-363 FP-361 FP-364

Disassembling procedure of Mechanism

deck (DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY) are not shown.

Pages 2-15 and 2-16 are not shown.

2-14E,

MVC-CD200/CD300 SECTION 3 BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

CD-333 BOARD(MVC-CD200) SY-67 BOARD(1/2) CD-334 BOARD(MVC-CD300)

(4-25) ZOOM (4-14) LENS IRIS (4-15) (4-16) (SHUTTER) IC202 12 AD DATA 12 16 DATA BUSIC101 IC401 CCD OUT IC301 (MVC-CD200) (MVC-CD300) CAMERA DSPS/H,AGC,A/D CONV. MEMORY CONTROL CCD IMAGER VIDEO ENCODER 14 ADDRESS BUS M002 M001 (4-14) OPD,OSD,HOST IF ZOOM FOCUS (MVC-CD300) (MVC-CD200) V1A,V1B,V2, V3A,V3B,V4, RES CONTROL MOTOR MOTOR IRIS IRIS SG,JPEG,L-MODE ADDRESS METER HALL RG,VSHTMETER

M ZOOM FOCUS IC201 MMMH1,H2 AUDIO I/FH 14 IC302RESET RESET TIMING CAM SO,XCAM,SCKSENSOR SENSOR SHUTTER CONTROL

GENERATOR MCK12 STROBO CONTROL DATA SDRAM64Mbit IRIS CONT 1,2

IC303 MC XCS2 (4-26) MC XCS2

MC XCS6 MC XCS6

IC302 FOCUS IC304MOTOR IRIS SHUTTER CAM SO,CAM SI,XCAM SCK

DRIVE DRIVE DRIVE IRIS DRIVE

ZOOM MOTOR DRIVE

(4-11) IC301 HALL (+) HALL AMP HALL AD IC101 (4-11) (4-11,12) EXT STRB ON EXT STRB ON

EVR

IRIS EN MSHUT ON (4-24) PE EN 0,1 Y IC201 PE DIR 0A,1A VIDEO OUTC PE DIR 0B,1B VIDEO AMP CONTINUED ON XZM RST SENS (SEE PAGE 3-3) XFC RST SENS (4-28) (MVC-CD300) AU SDTO AU SDTO AU SDTI AU SDTI DIR 0B MSHUT ON IC103 Y

IC104 CAM SO,CAM SI,XCAM SCK R-Y TK-61 BOARD IC105 B-YSTB ON VD,HD FP-370 (MVC-CD300)S502 IRIS PRE-DRIVE

(FLEXIBLE) LENS CAP XLENS OPEN SW (4-24) PRE LAMP Q501 CAM SO,CAM SI,XCAM SCK LED PRE LAMP AF ON

DRIVE

SYSTEM CONTROL SIG (SEE PAGE 4-18) (SEE PAGE 4-18)

IC901 TG CLKMC CLK

CLOCK AU CLK BT901 FS-83 BOARD(1/2) GENERATOR USB CLK LCD901

BATTERY

TERMINAL (SEE PAGE 4-57) PK-58 BOARD(1/2)(4-32) IC401 2.5INCHBATT SIG VD,HD LCD FAST CHARGE TIMING PANEL

GENERATOR S BATT/XEXT

SYS DD ON (4-69) LCD DD ONYRCAM DD ON IC301 R-Y IC302 Q001,002 G EVR B-Y LCD B

DRIVE

(4-41) (4-67) (4-68) J901 DC IN IC001 D 3.4V ND901 CAM 15V IC201,202 BL HIGHBL UNREG BACK LIGHT DC/DC CAM P5V BACK LIGHT DRIVE CONVERTER CW D 4.6V A 4.9V F002 CAM -7.5V (4-71,72) F004 CAM 3.1V D 3.4V A 3.4V D 1.8V PANEL -15.3V PANEL 13.2V FLASH UNIT PANEL 6.5V PANEL 4.9V (SEE PAGE 4-39) STB CHARGE FLASH CAM 5V (MVC-CD300) UNIT ST UNREG S401 F001 STRB POPUP FLASH CW UNREG OPEN/CLOSE F003 ACV UNREG BL UNREG Q703,704 PL901 F005 ST UNREG STB PLUNGER PLUNGER STROB F006 DRIVE PLUNGER BATT UNREG 3-1 3-2 PE EN1 PE DIR 1A PE DIR 1B XZM RST SENS XFC RST SENS PE EN0 PE DIR 0A PE DIR 0B IRIS EN IRIS EN MSHUT ON MSHUT ON,

MVC-CD200/CD300

3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

SY-67 BOARD(2/2) MD-083 BOARD BASE UNIT OPTICAL DEVICE

FMDT,FMCK (4-33) FMDT,FMCK (DDX-G2100)

IC154 PH901IC414 ENCEFM IC207 EQ EFM LD LASER IC155 DRIVE DIODEDATA

ATAP1 DATA BUS 16 BUS 16 CD-R 8 IC408 CD-R/RW

GA

SWITCH SWDT,SDCK IC013ENC/DEC 16 16 16 EFM ENC BUFFER A-H CONTROL DRAM CD-R/RW

PD

12 (4-50) RF

IC

3 PROCESSADDRESS BUS 3 (4-53)

ADDRESS

HCS0,1 20 8 MDATA,BCLK,LRCK IC201 RF AC 24 12 17 FRONT(4-54) (4-46) MONITOR

CD

DSP FE,TE

IC501 IC504 IC503 AUDIO OAC

SDRAM FLASH ROM88(4-49) MC CAM 64Mbit 16Mbit IC014 IC001 SH DSP FOCUS (4-29) (4-31) (4-31) DATA BUS FOCUS FOCUS/

COIL

MC XCS2 SERVO TRACKING MC XCS6 MC XCS3 MC XCS0 DRIVE TRACKING (4-47) TRACKING ADDRESS BUS SERVO COIL(4-32)

IC505 IC01917 16 16

EVR IC00520 (D/A CONV) EEPROM SLED SERVO SLED M

IC401 IC406 IC404 (4-48) DRIVE(4-47) M902SLED

SRAM EEPROM SYSTEM MOTORCONTROL(MD) USB D+/D- OUT (4-52) (4-52) (4-51) CAM SO,CAM SI,XCAM SCK USB D+/D- IN IC003

SPINDLE

Q412,416 SERVO SPINDLE M

DRIVE

DOOR LOCK DRIVE (4-47) M901

SPINDLE

(4-48) MOTOR EXT STRB ON DOOR LOCK CONTINUED ON (SEE PAGE 3-2) DEW SENS S001 FS-83 BOARD(2/2) DEW SENSOR (SEE PAGE 4-57) KEY AD0,AD1,AD2,AD3 KEY AD0 CONTROL XPOWER ON BUTTON

IC402 DIAL A,B

MODE DIAL XPB ON S002 MODE CONTROL XSET UP KEY AD1 (4-36) XSHTR ON MENU SW XAE LOCK ON IC401 LANC SIG LANC SIG LANC IN J101 LANC OUT LANC I/O (4-61) ACC HALL AD (4-35) S301,303,304,306,307 USB D+/D- OUT PK-58 BOARD XLENS OPEN ACV UNREG USB D+/D- IN IC101 D+,D- CN102 KEY AD2 FUNCTION BACK UP VCC PRE LAMP AF ON IC403 BATT UNREG USB SW (2/2)USB I/F CAM DD ON VL 3V S305 (SEE PAGE 4-67) BACK UP VCC BATT SIG RESET RESET

SW

FAST CHARGE RESET BT101RESET (LITHIUM BATTERY) BATT/XEXT S102 SYS DD ON (4-36)

XEJECT

LCD DD ON OPEN/CLOSE STB CHARGE CONTROL STB PLUNGER ON KEY AD3 S101 S103 ZOOM SW STB POPUP SWITCHXLID OPEN OPEN/CLOSE

BLOCK

BEEP XPOWER ON POWER SW (ZK-503) VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT (SEE PAGE 4-55) DIAL A,B JOG J102 DIAL

IC252

AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT A/V OUT(MONO) AU SDTO AU SDTO IC251 AU OUT LINE/ MODE DIAL AU SDTI AU SDTI AU IN SPEAKERAMP XPB ON AUDIO SP+,SP- XSET UP MODE AD/DA MIC AMP AU SP+,SP- SP901 DIAL CONV. SPEAKER MIC SIG SYSTEM CONTROL SIG (4-37) (4-38) JK-208 BOARD XSHTR ON CONTROL MIC901 XAE LOCK ON SHUTTER SW SWITCH MIC BLOCK (RL-503) 16 (SEE PAGE 4-40) 3-3 3-4 HI SO,HI SI,XHI SCK

RESET

,

MVC-CD200/CD300

3-3. MODE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

FS-83 BOARD S001 SY-67 BOARD(3/3)

(SEE PAGE 4-57) (CONTROL BUTTON)

IC403

UP SET RIGHT D405 (CHARGE) BACKUP VCC, RESET LEFT DOWN S002 VDD 8 VRO V BAT 3 MENU CN001 CN708 XRESET65RESET KEY AD0 10 2 82 KEY AD0 IC402 D404 KEY AD1 47 11 1 83 KEY AD1 MODE CONTROL VDD • 6 VOUT V IN 7 ACV UNREG D004 POWER LED 659 3 25 XPOWER LED (4-36) BATT UNREG (POWER) VDD BACKUP VCC 98 D403 Q402 AVCC 90 LANC UNREG IC401 22 XLANC ON CMOD 26 4 CS (4-36)

JK-208 BOARD(2/2) 4 BATT IN 15•CN101 LANC1 8

(SEE PAGE 4-61) I/O ACV SENS 94LANC DC CN709 6 22 14 10 95 LANC IN LANC SIG (4-35) BATT SENS 93 3 25 11 12 96 LANC OUT VL 3V BT101 27 1 LITHIUM D401 BATTERY BATT/XEXT 14 BATT/XEXT13 XLANC PWR ON J102 Q404 INIT CHARGE 36 INIT CHARGE LANC JACK IN A/V OUT 5 23 20 LANC JACK IN FAST CHARGE 37 FAST CHARGE POWER (MONO) S101 S103 SYS DD ON 31 SYS DD ON OPEN/ VDD XLID OPEN Q408 CLOSE DET 26 2 12 XLID OPEN BATT SI 78 S102 I/F BATT SIGBATT SO 79 OPEN/ XEJECT CLOSE DET 2534XEJECT Q101,102 EXT FLASH EXT STROB ON IC402 41 27

DRIVE

CN702

PK-58 BOARD(2/3) 3.4Vp-p XSTB FULLXSTB FULL 18 8

CN302 (SEE PAGE 4-67) CN301 CN707 100nsec STB CHARGE LANC IN STB CHG 35 1 CPC 11 29 30 STRB PHOTO ON LANC OUT 2 FOR CHECK 12 28 29 PHOTO TR OUT CAM DD ON FLASH5 S305 S401 STROB ON RESET Q701,702 7 UNIT RESET23FLASH 44 XSTRB POP UP A4.9V OPEN/CLOSE A4.9V 3

UNREG

KEY AD2 ST UNREG 6 31 32 84 KEY AD2 S304 S307 S306 S303 S301 SPOT FOCUS EXPOSURE AE DISPLAY METER LOCK Q301 D304 LED CHARGE DRIVE 32 33 XCHARGE/STB LED CN701 D302 ACCESS LED TH OUT 87 3 TH OUT MD BLOCK ACCESS1247 XLID OPEN (MD-083) (SEE PAGE 3-21 PL901 Q703,704 of LEVEL 3) CN712 STROB VCC 1 PLUNGER 43 STB PLUNGER PLUNGER DRIVE CN713 DEW DEW SENS 1 91 DEW SENS

SENSOR FP-370 TK-61 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-18) FLEXIBLE (MVC-CD300) CN703S502 CN501

(SEE PAGE 4-18) LENS CAP339XLENS CAP OPEN XRST FLASH 33 XRST FLASH PRE LAMP LED IC402 HI SO 76 HI SOCN503 Q501 PRE LAMP AF ON 4 LED22X402 99 32kHz IN HI SI 75 HI SI DRIVE SELF TIMER 32.768kHz555100 32kHz OUT HI SCK 77 HI SCK X401 3 10MHz IN XMC CS 74 XMC CS 2.0Vp-p 10MHzµ410MHz OUT XMC NMI 73 XMC NMI30.5 sec S002 XMC HELP 97 XMC HELP

CONTROL CN705 XRST SYS 34 XRST SYSDIAL B

JOG 1 42 DIAL B AV JACK IN 21 AV JACK IN CAMERA(2)

SWITCH DIAL DIALA241 DIAL A USB JACK IN 19 USB JACK IN (SEE PAGE 3-19

KEY AD3

BLOCK 4 85 KEY AD3 Q407 of LEVEL 3)

MELODY 80 (ZK-503) S005 S004 MOD BEEPMELODY ENV 38 JOG ZOOM ZOOM SETTWBEEP ON 37 BEEP ON (SEE PAGE 4-55) SELF TIMER S001 POWER S003 XPOWER ON77XPOWER ON ON/OFF ACCESS LED XPB ON 11 8 XPB ON MODE XSET UP DIAL 12 88 XSETUP ON MODE DIAL 13 86 MODE DIAL PAL/XNTSC 32 PAL/XNTSC SYS V 16 SYS V STRB PHOTO IN CAMERA(1) PHOTO TR OUT (SEE PAGE

CONTROL (SHUTTER) STROB ON 3-16(MVC-CD200),CN710

XRST SYS 3-18(MVC-CD300)

SWITCH XSHTR ON 1 10 XSHTR ON of LEVEL 3)PRE LAMP AF ON BLOCK XAE LOCK SW 2 11 XAE LOCK ON EXT STRB ON

(RL-503) 16 (SEE PAGE 4-40) 3-5 3-6,

MVC-CD200/CD300

3-4. LCD BLOCK DIAGRAM ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

BACK LIGHT UNIT PK-58 BOARD(3/3) Q206SWITCHING

ND901 (BACK LIGHT)

IC301 (4-67) IC302 ws 4.5Vp-p IC302 wf L201 4 L202 L2034.5Vp-p BL_UNREG 2

I/O EXP (EVR) Q209 T201 XCS PANEL D/A CAMERA(2) 16 22 XEN V REV 15135C216 CN201 (SY-67) XCAM SCK 18 19 CLK H REV 16 2H INVERTER 1 10 10 (SEE PAGE 3-19 2H (4-71) DRIVE of LEVEL3) CAM SO 17 20 SI COMTST 18 2 BRIGHT 1 IC20136IC302 w; SWITCHING Q204 D 3.4V 14 VCC COLOR 2 4.5Vp-p SWITCHING REG. 4 PANEL 3.4V 13 VDD BRT TST 12 Q201,202 23 VDDA BRT.R 3 PANEL 2 VCC OUTPUT 14.9V Q207,208 BRT.B 4 BL CONTRAST 5 LEVEL LED 2H PWM 2 VCO 8 AMP V COM96640 38 30 32 31 39 35RGB AMP FB Q2053 1 COM ADJ77SAWOSC BL LEVEL 10 4 (4-72) NTSC 17 IC202 1V D202 CURRENT BL LOW COM OUT43341 SHORT DETECT (4-68) CIRCUIT 5 PANELYYPROTECTPANELY88ROUT PANEL R-Y 20 PANEL R-Y R-Y7 9 IC302 PANEL B-Y B-Y G OUT Q203 CAMERA(1) PANEL B-Y 6 10 LCD DRIVE 22 PROTECT (SY-067) SWITCH (SEE PAGE IC3028BOUT 24 3-16(MVC-CD200), 3-18(MVC-CD300) of LEVEL 3) PANEL VPANELV4

HDO

HDO Q2103 LED SWITCH CN301 0.5Vp-pH CN401 44 25 26 14 48 29 28 R OUT VR 16 IC302 G OUT VG9 15 B OUT VB (4-69)

IC402 (1/2)

Q401-404 PANEL 4.9V VSH 2 0.2Vp-p COM OUT COM 12HWMSK W MSK,FRPV,FRPT COM AMP DRIVE IC302 q; BL LEVEL GND 13 LCD901

COM

V-COM 11

VG

0.2Vp-p VB12 VB12 2.5 INCH H PANEL COM GENERATOR 19 COLOR LCD UNIT (4-69) IC401 (4-69) VSSPANEL -15.3V 9

IC402 TIMING GENERATOR(2/2)

W MSK WIDOV 9 FILTER 32 PDP FRPT FRPV 11 VGH PANEL 13.2V 1 27 OSCI CLS VCO VCO MODE2/CLS 13 4

SPS

26 14OSC0 GRES/SPS5VREV 44 RESV REVC H REV MODE1/RES 18 18 46 H REVC COMTST EX2 47 COMTST EX2 20 20

NTSC

41 NTPC1 GPCK GPCK/EX1 15 6

HDO

37 SYNI CLDMCLK/CLD 24 24 PANEL V 34 P15 SPD OE/SPD 23 23 CN302 9 VG MO1 CPC 8 PANEL COM P XHD GSRT/MODE1 1673BGPO FOR 7 HSY MO2 RESET/MODE2 17 8 CHECK MAKER RECOG CTR 13 SRTL/CTR 22 22 R467 EX3HSY 4 HSY SRTR/EX3 21 21 4.7kΩ PANEL 4.9V 30 VDD FRPT/HCNT 7 GND 3-7 3-8 COLOR COLOR PANEL 3.4V VCC1 PANEL 6.5V VCC2 PANEL 4.9V VSH CONTRAST CONTRAST EXT BGP BRT TST BRT TST RGB AMP RGB AMP BLACK IN SUB BRT R BRT R SUB BRT B BRT B BRIGHT BRIGHT COM ADJ COM ADJ

FRPV

FRPT FRP COM FRP BL HIGH,

MVC-CD200/CD300

3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

FS-83 BOARD(1/2) CN001 CN708 CN701BATT SIG (4-33,34) BACK UP VCC

2 10 48 (SEE PAGE 4-57) BATT/XEXT BT90148D3.4V9D3.4V BATTERY FAST CHARGE TERMINAL57IC151-160 10 POWER(3) INIT CHARGE66CN001 MD 11 D 4.6V (MD-083) F006 INTERFACE BATT UNREG BATT UNREG 12 (SEE PAGE 1 14 1 XMD POWER SAVE F001 20 3-13) 5 10 CW UNREG CW 3.4V

S BATT SIG 152 6 9

F002 14 CW UNREG7813 3 Q001, Q003, F00387002 004 HI UNREG96CHARGE F004 J901 10 5SWITCH DC IN 11 4 LF001 F005 ACV UNREG 12 3 ST UNREG 1322BATT SIGCN004 BATT/XEXT CN001 CN002 ACV UNREG (4-41) BATT UNREG

IC001 VDD

BATT/XEXT DC/DC CONVERTER Q004 FAST CHARGE SWITCHING L008 4.6V INIT CHARGECW D 4.6V OUT1-6 4 -IN(E)6 11 SYS DD ON 63 VCC4,5,6 L005 CAM P 5V XMD POWER SAVE L002 51 A 4.9V LCD DD ONVCC2 Q001 IN(C)6 9 SWITCHING L001 L015 CAM DD ON4.9V PANEL 4.9V 42 VCC1,3 POWER(2) OUT1-5 64 Q009,011 Q013 IC002 (4-42) (SEE PAGE -IN(E)5 16 Q027 3-11)4.9V DETECT CAM 3.1V3.1V REG BL UNREG Q005 L014 A 3.4V IN(C)5 14 SWITCHING L004 3.4V L011 D 3.4V L016 CW D 3.4V OUT1-4 57 Q012 Q019,021 OUT2-4 60 Q007 EMERGENCY 13.2V PANEL 13.2V -IN(E)4 19 DETECT REG 28 VCC Q002 T001 D002 SWITCHING RECT 15V L01345PANEL -15.3V Q018,022 PANEL 13.2V 22 RC IN(C)4 18 D001 PANEL 6.5V 1 RECT 6.5V 6.5V PANEL 6.5V PANEL 4.9V6 21 RT SCP 13 REG Q023-026 ST UNREGQ010 CAM 15V D 1.8V 8 EMERGENCY OUT1-3 56 30 CTL 1 DETECT D 3.4V 2 Q016,020 CAM 3.1V 29 CTL 2 -IN(E)3 33 –7.5V –7.5V CAM –7.5V A 3.4V3 REG A 4.9V CAM P 5V D003,004 Q015,017 IN(C)3 34 PANEL -15.3V RECT –15.3V Q003 REGMVC-CD300 SWITCHING L010 5V CAM 5V OUT1-2 50 -IN(E)2 36 IN(C)2 37 Q006 SWITCHING L006 D 1.8V OUT 1-1 46 OUT 2-1 43 -IN(E)1 39 Q008

SWITCHING

REF 1.5V 27 V REF SYS DD ON LCD DD ON CAM DD ON MVC-CD300 CAM 5V IN(C)1 40 51 CAM 15V CAM –7.5V 50 CAM 3.1V POWER(3) 52 (CD-333/334) D 3.4V 13 (SEE PAGE 2 CAM P 5V 3-13) CAM 3.1V

SY-67 BOARD(1/2) CN704

3-9 3-10,

MVC-CD200/CD300

3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

SY-67 BOARD(2/2) POWER LED FS-83 BOARD(1/2)3 9 D004

(POWER) (SEE PAGE 4-57) D 3.4V57CN708 CN001

CONTROL SWITCH

RESET BLOCK (ZK-503) VL 3V (SEE PAGE 4-55) (4-36) S003 (4-36) XPOWER ON POWERIC403 Q408 7 ON/OFF BATT SIG 78 BATT SI STB CHG 35 IF BLOCK IC402 CAM 3.1V 79 BATT SO XSTB FULL 18 5 JOG DIAL MODE CONTROL 3 RESET 5 90 XRESET ACV UNREG D404 STRB PLUNGER ON 98 BACKUP VCC CAM 3.1V 14 MODE DIAL D403 6 CN705BATT UNREG VDD65 7 REG 90 AVCC DET 4 26 CMOD CN301 15 BATT IN8A3.4V PANEL 3.4V L301 12 11 VDD (4-67) (4-68) (4-69) (4-69) 93 BATT SENS XPWR ON 7 IC301 IC302 IC401 IC402 POWER LED 25 EVR LCD TIMING COM 94 ACV SENS DRIVE GENERATOR AMP LCD901 2 VSH PANEL 4.9V L403 P 4.9V BATT/XEXT 14 13 12 LCD FAST CHARGE PANEL -15.3V L402 VSS INIT CHARGE 16 15 9 UNIT PANEL 13.2V L401 VGH 15 14 1 14 BATT/XEXT PANEL 6.5V CN401 13 12 36 FAST CHARGE CN401 35 INIT CHARGE D 3.4V 11 10 XLANC ON 22 S305 PK-58 BOARD SYS DD ON RESET 31 SYS DD ON (4-71,72)RESET32XMD POWER SAVE BL UNREG 23 22 IC201,202 LCD DD ON 22 21 BACK LIGHT DRIVE CAM DD ON ACV UNREG ACV UNREG HI UNREG 31 30 10 CN302 CPC VDD VDD 24 23 (FOR CHECK)18 POWER(1) Q402 (4-35) CN707 CN801 (SEE PAGE 4 IC401 J101 3-10) 8 LANC UNREG LANC DC 1 LANC I/O 14 22 6 LANC/ D405 EXT FLASH (CHARGE) VL 3V 1 27 S101,103 VDD VDD BT101 (LITHIUM BATTERY) 13 15 OPEN/CLOSE BL UNREG

IC101 TK-61 BOARD FP-370

PANEL -15.3V D 3.4V PANEL 13.2V 14 14 (SEE PAGE 4-18)USB I/F (FLEXIBLE)PANEL 6.5V PANEL 4.9V CN709 CN101 (4-61) (SEE PAGE 4-18) Q501 (MVC-CD300) JK-208 BOARD LED (4-24) DRIVE CAM P 5V 1

IC102-10511PRELAMP2 LED IC901 IC101 CN703 CN501 CN503IRIS MOTOR

PRE-DRIVE CLOCK EVR GENERATOR (D/A CONV.) (4-32) (4-24) ST UNREG ST UNREG D 1.8V ST UNREG D 3.4V D 3.4V STB CHG CAM 3.1V CAM 3.1V XSTB FULL FLASH A 3.4V A 3.4V Q701,702 STRB ON 7 UNIT A 4.9V A 4.9V A 4.9V A 4.9V 3 CAM P 5V CAM P 5V CAM P 5V CN702 CAM DD ON L258 IC252 IC251 IC301 IC302 IC501 IC503 IC504 IC505 STRBSP VCC PLUNGER ON LINE/ AUDIO CAMERA DSP 64Mbit MC CAM FLASH ROM SDRAM EEPROM PL901 Q253 SPEAKER AD/DA AMP CONV. MEMORY CONTROL SDRAM SH-DSP 16Mbit 16Mbit CAM P 5V VCC STROB (4-38) (4-37) VIDEO ENCODER 1 PLUNGER OPD,OSD,HOST IF (4-26) (4-29) (4-31) (4-31) (4-32) Q703,704 CN712 RES CONTROL SG,JPEG,L-MODE

IC201 STRB ON CAM DD ON199 18

VIDEO (4-25) LCD DD ON21 AMP XMD POWER SAVE (4-28) 3-11 3-12,

MVC-CD200/CD300

3-7. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

MD-083 BOARD (4-51,52) (4-51,53)(4-51) IC402,403 IC400,407 (4-48) IC401 IC406 IC404 IC406,418 IC419,422,423 IC022

BACKUP VCC D405 48 SRAM EEPROM 16 100 SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM Q402 CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL SLFG (MD) PERIPHERAL PERIPHERAL AMP

SW

Q403,404, (4-52) (4-52) D 3.4 9 3.4V L402 3.4V 10 Q407,409 DSP3.4V DSP3.4V XPD IC007 FB410 (4-46,47,48) (4-45,47)D 4.6 11 4.6V IC013 OFFSET VC(G) MAP 12 12 FB405 4.6V-2 IC200 IC201 IC207 IC019 IC014 IC009-012 IC002,004 CD-R/RW

RF

PROCESS (4-45) BASE

IC208 IC015 IC006 UNITCD CD-R/RW EVR

XMD POWER SAVE DSP GA (D/A CONV.) SERVO (4-46) 20 AUDIO TSHOCK DAC SERVO SERVO DETECT PERIPHERAL PERIPHERAL 4.6V VCC(VC) (4-49) (4-50) (4-48) (4-48) 11 (4-49) L001 4.6V 4.6V FB002 20 LDD5V POWER(1) (SY-67) 4.6V-2 CN001 21 (SEE PAGE CW 3.4V 3.4V15 3-10) 3.4V VCC (4-47) CN002

IC414 IC408 IC005 IC001 IC003 IC204 IC209

ATAPI IC410,413 (4-53) CD-R BUFFER TRACKINGENC/DEC SPINDLEDRAM SLED DRIVE DRIVE SWITCH AMP EFM ENC DRIVE IC414 PERIPHERAL

IC425 CONTROL FOCUS DRIVE

(4-54) (4-53) (4-47) (4-47) (4-49) (4-53) (4-50) Q417,411 DOOR LOCK 4.6V-2 PL902 CW UNREG 13 DC/DC POWER5V 3.4V VCC CONVERTER 1 DOOR LOCK14 CN405 Q412,416 CN404 (MVC-CD300) CN203 CD-334 BOARD (MVC-CD300) IC201 IC202 CAM 5V LENS UNIT 51 TIMING S/H,AGC GENERATOR A/D CONV. F SENS VCC FOCUS RESET14 (4-14) (4-14) XLENS RST LED SENSOR

IC401

CAM 15V FB225 49 CCD Z SENS VCC FB226 ZOOM RESETCAM -7.5V IMAGER 2 47 SENSOR (4-16) CN303 POWER(1) CAM 3.1V (SY-67) Q30252 (SEE PAGE D 3.4V L30313 3-10) CAM P 5V24LENS UNIT

IC101 IC303,304 F SENS VCC 7 FOCUS RESETSENSOR IC302 IC301 CCD

IMAGER IRIS DRIVE ZOOM HALL AMP MOTOR FOCUS/IRIS (4-15) (4-11,12) Z SENS VCC MOTOR DRIVE ZOOM RESETDRIVE 19 SENSOR (4-11) (4-11) CN301 CAM 3.1V

CD-333 BOARD

(MVC-CD200)

Camera block diagrams and MD block diagrams are not shown. Pages from 3-15 to 3-26 are not shown.

3-13 3-14E,

MVC-CD200/CD300 SECTION 4 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2) 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16

A B LENS UNIT CCD MVC-CD300 MVC-CD200 IMAGER CD-333 BOARD (MVC-CD200) CD-334 BOARD (MVC-CD300)

1/3 LD BLOCK

C 2/3 CH BLOCK

3/3 CCD BLOCK

D

PL901

STROB

PLUNGER DEW SENSOR

E TK-61 BOARD FP-364 FLEXIBLE FS-139 FS-140

(MVC-CD300) HARNESS HARNESS S502 (LENS CAP DETECT)

F

CN503 5P CN501 5P CN703 5P

FP-370 1 CAM_P_5V CAM_P_5V11CAM_P_5V FLEXIBLE 2 CAM_P_5V PRELAMP_AF_ON22PRELAMP_AF_ON

3 N,C LENS_CAP_OPEN 3 FP-369 3 LENS_CAP_OPEN 4 PRELAMP_LED REG_GND 4 FLEXIBLE 4 REG_GND LED901 5 PRELAMP_LED SELF_TIMER55SELF_TIMER (PRELAMP) TO

SY-67 BOARD(2/2) G SY-67 BOARD(1/2) FH(2/2)

1/10 LD BLOCK 6/10 CW BLOCK 2/10 PEARL BLOCK 7/10 FR BLOCK 3/10 VI BLOCK 8/10 AU BLOCK 4/10 SH BLOCK 9/10 CN BLOCK 5/10 GEN BLOCK 10/10 DD BLOCK

H CN711 2P

MIC_SIG 1 MIC MIC 901 MIC_GND 2 CN706 2P SP+ 1 SP901

SPEAKER

SP- 2

I

BOARD to BOARD

J MD-083 BOARD

1/5 ANALOG BLOCK 2/5 DRIVE BLOCK 3/5 DSP,GA BLOCK 4/5 CHAGALL BLOCK 5/5 H8S BLOCK

K

CN405 2P PL902 DOOR 1 VCC

LOCK

PLUNGER 2 GND

L FP-372 FLEXIBLE

PH901 OPTICAL PD FOCUS TRACKING DEVICE COIL COIL M FG M FG M901 M902

M SPINDLE MOTOR SLED MOTOR MECHANISM DECK DDX-G2100 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)

4-1 4-2 CN303 16P Z_SENS_GND 1 Z_SENS_VCC 2 Z_SENS_RST 3 TEMP_COM_(GND) 4 FOCUS_B 5 FOCUS_A 6 FOCUS_B 7 FOCUS_A 8 ZOOM_B 9 ZOOM_A 10 ZOOM_A 11 CN001 32P ZOOM_B 12 1 FCS- F_SENS_GND 13 CN404 50P CN701 50P CN704 70P CN203 70P 2 TRK- F_SENS_VCC 14 REG_GND 50 50 REG_GND 1 MT_GND CAM_P_5V21MT_GND CAM_P_5V23TRK+ F_SENS_RST 15 REG_GND 49 49 REG_GND 3 MT_GND CAM_P_5V43MT_GND CAM_P_5V44FCS+ N.C. 16 BACK_UP_VCC 48 48 BACK_UP_VCC 5 HALL_AD HALL_OFFSET65HALL_AD HALL_OFFSET65FGND CN302 6P XLID_OPEN 47 47 XLID_OPEN 7 HALL_REF HALL_GAIN87HALL_REF HALL_GAIN86GND N.C. 1 HDB7 46 46 HDB7 9 LD_GND IRIS_CONT1 10 9 LD_GND IRIS_CONT1 107FIRIS_A 2 HDB8 45 45 HDB8 11 LD_GND IRIS_CONT2 12 11 LD_GND IRIS_CONT2 128BIRIS_B 3 HDB6 44 44 HDB6 13 D_3.4V XLENS_RST_LED 14 13 D_3.4V XLENS_RST_LED 149AIRIS_A 4 HDB9 43 43 HDB9 15 PE_DIR1B PE_DIR1A 16 15 PE_DIR1B PE_DIR1A 16 10 H IRIS_B 5 HDB5 42 42 HDB5 17 PE_EN1 XZM_RST_SENS 18 17 PE_EN1 XZM_RST_SENS 18 11 VCC N.C. 6 HDB10 41 41 HDB10 19 MSHUT_ON XZM_RST_SENS1 20 19 MSHUT_ON XZM_RST_SENS1 20 12 VC HDB4 40 40 HDB4 21 IRIS_EN DIR0B 22 21 IRIS_EN DIR0B 22 13 G HDB11 39 39 HDB11 23 PE_DIR0B PE_DIR0A 24 23 PE_DIR0B PE_DIR0A 24 CN301 26P 14 D HDB3 38 38 HDB3 25 PE_EN0 XFC_RST_SENS 26 25 PE_EN0 XFC_RST_SENS 26 FOCUS_A 1 15 C HDB12 37 37 HDB12 27 LENS_TEMP_AD CCD_TEMP 28 27 LENS_TEMP_AD CCD_TEMP 28 FOCUS_B 2 16 E HDB2 36 36 HDB2 29 XCAM_RESET VSUB_CNT 30 29 XCAM_RESET VSUB_CNT 30 FOCUS_B 3 17 NC HDB13 35 35 HDB13 31 XEAGLE/XGCAM_CS PAL/XNTSC 32 31 XEAGLE/XGCAM_CS PAL/XNTSC 32 FOCUS_A 4 18 FPDVC HDB1 34 34 HDB1 33 XCAM_SO XTG_CS 34 33 XCAM_SO XTG_CS 34 F_SENS_GND 5 19 FPDO HDB14 33 33 HDB14 35 XCAM_SCK CD_GND 36 35 XCAM_SCK CD_GND 36 F_SENS_RST 6 20 LDD5V HDB0 32 32 HDB0 37 CD_GND TG_CLK 38 37 CD_GND TG_CLK 38 F_SENS_VCC 7 21 LDD5V HDB15 31 31 HDB15 39 CD_GND CD_GND 40 39 CD_GND CD_GND 40 HALL- 8 22 CFREQ HRESET 30 30 HRESET 41 CD_GND MCK12 42 41 CD_GND MCK12 42 BIAS- 9 23 CMOD DREQ 29 29 DREQ 43 CD_GND CD_GND 44 43 CD_GND CD_GND 44 HALL+ 10 24 PGND GND 28 28 GND 45 CA_HD CA_FD 46 45 CA_HD CA_FD 46 BIAS+ 11 25 VRDC NC(IOCHRDY) 27 27 NC(IOCHRDY) 47 CAM_-7.5V CAM_3.1V 48 47 CAM_-7.5V CAM_3.1V 48 DRIVE+ 12 26 VWDC2 IOW 26 26 IOW 49 CAM_15V CAM_3.1V 50 49 CAM_15V CAM_3.1V 50 DRIVE- 13 27 VWDC1 REG_GND 25 25 REG_GND 51 CAM_5V CAM_3.1V 52 51 CAM_5V CAM_3.1V 52 ZOOM_A 14 28 LDGND IOR 24 24 IOR 53 CAMTEST0 CA_AD05 54 53 CAMTEST0 CA_AD05 54 ZOOM_B 15 29 OSCON DACK 23 23 DACK 55 CAMTEST1 CA_AD06 56 55 CAMTEST1 CA_AD06 56 ZOOM_B 16 30 ODON HA1 22 22 HA1 57 CA_AD00 CA_AD07 58 57 CA_AD00 CA_AD07 58 ZOOM_A 17 31 W/XR HINT 21 21 HINT 59 CA_AD01 CA_AD08 60 59 CA_AD01 CA_AD08 60 Z_SENS_GND 18 32 ENBL XMD_POWER_SAVE 20 20 XMD_POWER_SAVE 61 CA_AD02 CA_AD09 62 61 CA_AD02 CA_AD09 62 Z_SENS_VCC 19 CN002 18P HA0 19 19 HA0 63 CA_AD03 CA_AD10 64 63 CA_AD03 CA_AD10 64 Z_SENS_RST 20 1 TKC HA2 18 18 HA2 65 CA_AD04 CA_AD11 66 65 CA_AD04 CA_AD11 66 TEMP_OUT 21 2 SD- HCS0 17 17 HCS0 67 REG_GND PBLK 68 67 REG_GND PBLK 68 TEMP_COM_(GND) 22 3 SD+ HCS1 16 16 HCS1 69 REG_GND CLPOB 70 69 REG_GND CLPOB 70 OPEN 23 4 LED CW_3.4V 15 15 CW_3.4V OPEN 24 5 VCC CW_UNREG 14 14 CW_UNREG OPEN 25 6 VH- CW_UNREG 13 13 CW_UNREG OPEN 26 7 WIN2 D_4.6V 12 12 D_4.6V 8 WIN1 D_4.6V 11 11 D_4.6V 9 VIN1 D_3.4V 10 10 D_3.4V 10 VIN2 D_3.4V99D_3.4V 11 UIN! REG_GND88REG_GND 12 UIN2 REG_GND77REG_GND 13 VH+ REG_GND66REG_GND CN712 2P 14 LMT NC(MPXO_IF) 5 5 NC(MPXO_IF) VCC 1 15 GND REG_GND44REG_GND REG_GND 2 16 U TH_OUT33TH_OUT 17 V NC(DECEFM) 2 2 NC(DECEFM) 18 W NC(FMDT) 1 1 NC(FMDT) CN713 2P DEW_SENS 1 REG_GND 2,

MVC-CD200/CD300 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

CONTROL SWITCH A BLOCK(ZK-503)

S001 S002 S003 (MODE SWITCH) (EXEC)

CONTROL SWITCH

1 (P_AUTO) POWER ON/OFF(CHG) BLOCK(RL-503) FLASH UNIT (PLAY) A 2 S(AE-S) S004,005 (MOVIE) 6 10 SET (SHUTTER) UP (SET UP) B 3 A(AE-A) (ZOOM)

BWTLOCKSCN(SCENE) 5 4 M(MANUAL) ON PK-58 BOARD

1/3 RGB BLOCK

C 2/3 TG BLOCK3/3 BL BLOCK

CN707 33P CN301 32P CN401 24P CHARGE_LED 33 32 CHARGE_LED CLD 24 KEY_AD2 32 31 KEY_AD2 SPD 23

TO HI_UNREG 31 30 HI_UNREG CTR 22 SY-67 BOARD(1/2) LANC_IN 30 29 LANC_IN EX3 21 FH(1/2) D LANC_OUT 29 28 LANC_OUT EX2 20

REG_GND 28 27 REG_GND VB12 19 MS_SCLK 27 26 MS_SCLK RES 18 MS_BS 26 25 MS_BS TST 17 S301,303-307 MS_DIO 25 24 MS_DIO VR 16 LCD901 VDD 24 23 VDD VG 15 2.5 INCH BL_UNREG 23 22 BL_UNREG VB 14 COLOR LCD UNIT DISPLAY/ AE LOCK/ BL_UNREG 22 21 BL_UNREG GND 13

E SY-67 BOARD(2/2)

(SPOT METER) /RESET/ S401 BL_GND 21 20 BL_GND VSH 12(EXPOSURE)/ FOCUS (FLASH OPEN/CLOSE) BL_GND 20 19 BL_GND COM 11 XCAM_SCK 19 18 XCAM_SCK VGL 10 CAM_SO 18 17 CAM_SO VSS 9 D302 XCS_PANEL_D/A 17 16 XCS_PANEL_D/A MO2 8 PANEL_-15.3V 16 15 PANEL_-15.3V MO1 7 PANEL_13.2V 15 14 PANEL_13.2V GPCK 6

ACCESS

PANEL_4.9V 14 13 PANEL_4.9V SPS 5

F PANEL_6.5V 13 12 PANEL_6.5V CLS 4D304

PANEL_3.4V 12 11 PANEL_3.4V VCC 3 D_3.4V 11 10 D_3.4V VSH 2 REG_GND 10 9 REG_GND VGH 1 /CHG PANEL_Y98PANEL_Y PANEL_R-Y87PANEL_R-Y CN201 10P PANEL_B-Y76PANEL_B-Y BL_HIGH 10 REG_GND65REG_GND N.C. 9

G PANEL_V54PANEL_V ND901N.C. 8 BACK LIGHT

HDO43HDO N.C. 7 D901 RESET32RESET N.C. 6 ACCESS_LED21ACCESS_LED N.C. 5 N.C. 1 N.C. 4 BL_LOW 3 (STARTER) LED 2 LED_GND 1

H FP-361 FP-362 FS-136 FLEXIBLE FLEXIBLE HARNESS

CPC (FOR CHECK)

I CN002 3P

BT901 ACV_UNREG 1 BATTERY

TERMINAL

ACV_GND 2 BATT/XEXT 3 J101 CN003 3P

ACC JK-208 BOARD BATT_UNREG 1 J901FS-83 BOARD BATT_SIG 2 DC IN J BT101 S001 BATT_GND 3

S002 J102 (FLASH) A/V OUT (MONO) LITHIUM BATTERY

MENU

CN102 5P (EDIT SEARCH) (MACRO) 1 VCC S101,103 S102 D004 2 D- (OPEN/CLOSE) OPEN (USB) 3 D+

K (SELF TIMER)4 ID (POWER)

5 GND

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)

4-3 4-4 CN101 27P CN709 27P EXT_STROB_ON 27 1 EXT_STROB_ON REG_GND 26 2 REG_GND LANC_SIG 25 3 LANC_SIG REG_GND 24 4 REG_GND XLANC_JACK_IN 23 5 XLANC_JACK_IN LANC_DC 22 6 LANC_DC USB_DET 21 7 USB_DET AV_JACK_IN 20 8 AV_JACK_IN REG_GND 19 9 REG_GND V_OUT 18 10 V_OUT REG_GND 17 11 REG_GND A_OUT 16 12 A_OUT REG_GND 15 13 REG_GND D_3.4V 14 14 D_3.4V VDD 13 15 VDD USB_D+PULLUP 12 16 USB_D+PULLUP USB_D+OUT 11 17 USB_D+OUT USB_D-OUT 10 18 USB_D-OUT USB_TXENL 9 19 USB_TXENL USB_XVDATA 8 20 USB_XVDATA CN705 14P USB_D+IN 7 21 USB_D+IN DIAL_B 1 USB_D-IN 6 22 USB_D-IN DIAL_A 2 USB_SUSPND 5 23 USB_SUSPND GND 3 REG_GND 4 24 REG_GND KEY_AD3 4 XEJECT 3 25 XEJECT CAM_3.1V 5 XLID_OPEN 2 26 XLID_OPEN N.C 6 VL_3V 1 27 VL_3V XPOWER_ON 7 N.C 8 GND 9 N.C 10 XPB_ON 11 XSET_UP 12 MODE_DIAL 13 CN001 11P CN708 11P CAM_3.1V 14 REG_GND 1 11 REG_GND BATT_SIG 2 10 BATT_SIG REG_GND39REG_GND BATT/XEXT48BATT/XEXT FAST_CHARGE57FAST_CHARGE INIT_CHARGE66INIT_CHARGE CN710 6P D_3.4V75D_3.4V XSHTR_ON 1 REG_GND84REG_GND XAE_LOCK_SW 2 POWER_LED93POWER_LED NC 3 KEY_AD0 10 2 KEY_AD0 GND 4 KEY_AD1 11 1 KEY_AD1 NC 5 NC 6 CN004 14P CN001 14P REG_GND 1 14 REG_GND REG_GND 2 13 REG_GND REG_GND 3 12 REG_GND CN702 8P REG_GND 4 11 REG_GND STB_CHARGE 1 P_4.6V 5 10 P_4.6V STRB_PHOTO_ON 2 P_4.6V69P_4.6V A_4.9V 3 D_4.6V/1.8V78D_4.6V/1.8V UNREG_GND 4 D_4.6V/1.8V87D_4.6V/1.8V PHOTO_TR_OUT 5 HI_UNREG96HI_UNREG UNREG 6 D_3.4V/3.2V 10 5 D_3.4V/3.2V STROB_ON 7 D_3.4V/3.2V 11 4 D_3.4V/3.2V XSTB_FULL 8 ST_UNREG 12 3 ST_UNREG ST_UNREG 13 2 ST_UNREG BATT_UNREG 14 1 BATT_UNREG

FP-363 FLEXIBLE

CN302 18P 1 N,C 2 N,C 3 N,C 4 REG_GND 5 N,C 6 N,C 7 HSY 8 PANEL_COM 9 VG 10 HI_UNREG 11 LANC_IN 12 LANC_OUT 13 MAKER_RECOG 14 MS_SCLK 15 MS_BS 16 MS_DIO 17 N,C 18 VDD,

MVC-CD200/CD300

4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block) (For printed wiring boards) (Measuring conditions voltage and waveform) • b: Pattern from the side which enables seeing. • Voltages and waveforms are measured between the measure- (The other layers' patterns are not indicated.) ment points and ground when camera shoots color bar chart of • Through hole is omitted. pattern box. They are reference values and reference wave- • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. forms. * • There are few cases that the part printed on diagram isn’t (VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used.). mounted in this model. • Voltage values change depending upon input impedance of VOM • Chip parts. used.) * Transistor DiodeC65445645123331. Connection Pattern boxBE123321321543212121(For schematic diagrams) • All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. p: pF. 50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums. About 34cm (MVC-CD200) • Chip resistors are 1/10W unless otherwise noted. About 28cm (MVC-CD300) kΩ=1000Ω, MΩ=1000kΩ. • Caution when replacing chip parts. New parts must be attached after removal of chip. Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, Be- cause it is damaged by the heat. • Some chip part will be indicated as follows. Example C541 L452 22U 10UH TA A 2520 Front of the lens Kinds of capacitor Temperature characteristics External dimensions (mm) 2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig. a and the Fig. b can be obtain. • Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate that they are not used. H In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated. • All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, unless otherwise noted. • Signal name XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC • 2 : non flammable resistor • 1 : fusible resistor • C : panel designation • A : B+ Line * • : B– Line * A B A=B B AB • J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. * Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform) • C : adjustment for repair. * • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. * * Indicated by the color red. Electron beam scanned frame Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques CRT picture frame 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié. Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV) When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name. 4-5 Yellow Cyan Green Yellow White Cyan Magenta Green Red White Blue Magenta Red Blue,

MVC-CD200/CD300 CD-333 (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD (CD200)

— Ref. No. CD-333 Board; 1,000 Series — For printed wiring board MD-083 • Refer to page 4-78 for parts location. CD-RF PROCESS, SERVO, CD, DSP, • CD-333 board consists of multiple layers. However, only CD-R/RW GA, MD SYSTEM CONTROL,EFM/ENC CONTROL the sides (layers) A and B are shown. PK-58 • Chip parts (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT) Transistor DiodeC3BE21FS-83 (CHARGER)

There are a few cases that the part printed on

this diagram isn’t mounted in this model. JK-208 (USB INTERFACE) CD-333 (CD200) (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER)

LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER

CD-333 4-7 4-8,

MVC-CD200/CD300 CD-334 (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD (CD300)

— Ref. No. CD-334 Board; 1,000 Series — For printed wiring board • Refer to page 4-78 for parts location. SY-67LD, PEARL, VIDEO OUT, SH, 16M FLASH MEMORY, • CD-334 board consists of multiple layers. However, only 64M SDRAM, CLK GEN, CW, HI CONTROL, AUDIO PROCESS, DC/DC CONVERTER, the sides (layers) A and B are shown. • Chip parts FLASH UNIT Transistor DiodeC3TK-61 (LENS CAP DETECT) BE21

There are a few cases that the part printed on

this diagram isn’t mounted in this model. CD-334 (CD300) (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER)

LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER

4-9 4-10 CD-334,

MVC-CD200/CD300 For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-7 for CD-333 printed wiring board. • Refer to page 4-9 for CD-334 printed wiring board. 12345678910 11 12 13 14 MVC-CD200 C3060.033u R330

CD-333 BOARD(1/3) R309(MVC-CD200) 100k B 22001005 1608 1005

HALL_AD

CD-334 BOARD(1/3) (MVC-CD300) C305 R318 180k 1005A 3300p HALL_OFFSETB R324 16k 1005 ± 0.5% LENS DRIVE(LD BLOCK) 1608 IRIS_CONT2 1 TO(2/3)

HALL_REF -REF.NO.:1000 SERIES- R320 R3272700 100k

XX MARK:NO MOUNT R326 1005 1005

22k R328 IRIS_CONT187651005 100k R325R316 180k 1005 1k 1005 R323 C317 R331 ± 0.5%C318

IC303 180k 0.01uC313 1005 C314 B XX 0.1u0.001u 0.022u 1005 1005 B

B B 1005B IRIS DRIVE 1005 1005R3068910 11 12 13 14 Q30112342SD2216J-QR(K8).SO IC304 IRIS DRIVE HALL AMP

C R304 R307 R312

1k 100k 47k 1005 1005 1005 R303 10 Q303 1/16W C30276543212SD2216J-QR(K8).SO L304 1608 0.022u C303 10uH B 0.1u BIAS SWD302 2520 1SS401(TE85L) 1005

B

1608 CAM_3.1V R322 C316 C304 R308 12k 0.01u 1u 10k 1005

B

B 1005 HALL_GAIN

D 1608 C320 C312 C319

0.01u 0.1u R321 C315 R329 1u C321BBR314 R319 6.3V 10u

LENS BLOCK is replaced as a block. 1005 XX 10k330 22k B 6.3V1005 1005 B 1005 TA A So the PRINTED WIRING BOARD and 1005 1005 1005 1608 2 TO(2/3) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM are omitted. LD_GND

MVC-CD200 C301 TH301 C322XX 0.01u

B

C325 1005 R335 CN301 26P XX0BCCD_TEMP

E FOCUS_A 1 1005

FOCUS_B 2 C324 R332 R336XX 47k 0 L303 FOCUS_B3B1005 10uH2520 FOCUS_A 4 D_3.4V F_SENS_GND 5 LENS_TEMP_AD F_SENS_RST 6 XFC_RST_SENS R311 68k 1005 F_SENS_VCC 7 MVC-CD200 HALL- 8 Q302

F BIAS- 9 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO

R315 47k 1005 XZM_RST_SENS1 SWITCH R337 XX HALL+ 10 XLENS_RST_LED R305 BIAS+ 11 4700 1005 R317 68k 1005 DRIVE+ 12 XZM_RST_SENS DRIVE- 13 LENS ZOOM_A 14 PE_EN1 BLOCK ZOOM_B 15 PE_DIR1B ZOOM_B 16

G ZOOM_A 17 CAM_P_5VL302

Z_SENS_GND 18 10uH Z_SENS_VCC 19 Z_SENS_RST 20 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 TEMP_OUT 21 C310 TEMP_COM_(GND) 22 0.1u C309 B 0.01u C311 B 47uOPEN 23 1005 1005 6.3VTA B OPEN 24

H OPEN 25

OPEN 26 IC302 ZOOM MOTOR 6 TO(2/3,3/3) CD_GND DRIVE R338 FOCUS MOTOR XX DRIVE12345678910 11 12 MVC-CD300 CN303 16P R334 R310 180 56k MT_GND 3 TO(2/3) Z_SENS_GND 1 Z_SENS_VCC 2

I Z_SENS_RST 3

PE_DIR1A TEMP_COM_(GND) 4 FB305 0uH FOCUS_B 5 FB306 0uH FOCUS_A 6 FB307 0uH FOCUS_B 7 FB308 0uH FOCUS_A 8 ZOOM_B 9 ZOOM_A 10

J ZOOM_A 11

ZOOM_B 12 F_SENS_GND 13 R333 PE_EN0LENS BLOCK F_SENS_VCC 14 180 R313 56k PE_DIR0B F_SENS_RST 15 N.C. 16 C323 CN302 6P 0.1uB PE_DIR0A N.C. 1 1005

K FB301 0uHIRIS_A 2

FB302 0uH L301 IRIS_B 3 10uH FB303 0uH 2520 IRIS_A 4 FB304 0uH IRIS_B 5 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 N.C. 6

IC301

SHUTTER DRIVE

L

C307 C308 0.01u 47u 6.3V12345678910 11 12 B1005 TA B

M DIR0B

IRIS_EN MSHUT_ON

LENS DRIVE CD-333 (1/3)/CD-334 (1/3) 4-11 4-12

IC301 UPD16877MA-6A5-E2 VM1 VDD A1_FA B1_FA MVC-CD200 PGND PGND D301 A2_FB B2_FB MA111-(K8).S0 A3_ZA VM2_3 PGND B3_ZA A4_ZB PGND VM4 B4_ZB IN1 EN4 EN1 IN4 UPD16877MA-6A5-E2 IN2 EN3 IC302 EN2 IN3 VM1 VDD A1_FA B1_FA PGND PGND A2_FB B2_FB A3_ZA VM2_3 PGND B3_ZA A4_ZB PGND VM4 B4_ZB IN1 EN4 EN1 IN4 IC303 NJM12904V(TE2) IN2 EN3 EN2 IN3 OUT VCC IN(-) OUT IN(+) IN(-) GND IN(+) IC304 NJM12902V(TE2) OUT OUT IN(-) IN(-) IN(+) IN(+) VCC GND IN(+) IN(+) IN(-) IN(-) OUT OUT,

MVC-CD200/CD300 For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-7 for CD-333 printed wiring board. • Refer to page 4-9 for CD-334 printed wiring board. • Refer to page 4-73 for waveforms. 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15

CD-333 BOARD(2/3) (MVC-CD200) NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE S :STILL MODE CD-334 BOARD(2/3) (MVC-CD300) P :PB MODE A CAMERA PROCESS(CH BLOCK) R211 1k

-REF.NO.:1000 SERIES- TO SY-67 BOARD(1/10) CN704

XX MARK:NO MOUNT (THROUGH THE FP-364 FLEXIBLE) R239 1k

(SEE PAGE 4-23) CN203 70P L202 3 47uH R240 R241 R242TO(1/3) MT_GND 1 MT_GND CAM_P_5V 2 CAM_P_5V 2520 1k 1k 0 R248 XX 3 MT_GND CAM_P_5V 4 1608 C227 R245 R218 HALL_AD 5 HALL_AD HALL_OFFSET 6 HALL_OFFSET 47u C222

B11XX XX

TO(1/3) TO(1/3) 6.3V 0.1u HALL_REF 7 HALL_REF HALL_GAIN 8 TABB2TO(1/3) LD_GND 9 LD_GND IRIS_CONT1 10 IRIS_CONT1 R249 XX R21311 LD_GND IRIS_CONT2 12 IRIS_CONT2 R237 1608 XX XX C220 1u D_3.4V 13 D_3.4V XLENS_RST_LED 14 XLENS_RST_LED B R236 PE_DIR1B 15 PE_DIR1B PE_DIR1A 16 PE_DIR1A XX C219 PE_EN1 17 PE_EN1 XZM_RST_SENS 18 XZM_RST_SENS FB223 R221 0.1u 0uH 150 B MSHUT_ON TEST019 MSHUT_ON XZM_RST_SENS1 20 XZM_RST_SENS1 3 TO(1/3) 3 TO(1/3) S1.5/P0 IRIS_EN TEST121 IRIS_EN DIR0B 22 DIR0B

C R235 FB224 R222 S1.5/P0PE_DIR0B 23 PE_DIR0B PE_DIR0A 24 PE_DIR0A XX 0uH 150 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

C215 PE_EN0 25 PE_EN0 XFC_RST_SENS 26 XFC_RST_SENS 0.1u

B

27 LENS_TEMP_AD CCD_TEMP 28 S1.5/ C208LENS_TEMP_AD 11 D0 FB211 0uH R223 150 1005P3.1 0 0.1u 29 XCAM_RESET VSUB_CNT 30 VSUB_CONT 4 TO(3/3) D0 (D2) CHROMA B FB212 0uH R224 150 S1.5/P3.1 1005D1 31 XEAGLE/XGCAM_CS PAL/XNTSC 32 D1(D3) ADVSS D2 FB213 0uH R225 150 S1.5/P0 0 C214 33 XCAM_SO XTG_CS 34 D2(D4) LINE/COMPVID 0.1u D3 FB214 0uH R226 150 S1.5/P3.1 3.0 B 1005 35 XCAM_SCK CD_GND 36 D4 FB215 0uH R227 150 D3(D5) ADVDD1 S1.5/P3.1 S0.5/P0 C213 37 CD_GND TG_CLK 38 D4(D6) CLPBYP/L_ 1u

D D5 FB216 0uH R228 150 S1.5/P3.10B160839 CD_GND CD_GND 40 D5(D7) IC202 8 NC/L C212

D6 FB217 0uH R229 150 S1.5/P3.1 S1.5/P0 C211 0.1u 41 CD_GND MCK12 42 D6(D8) CCDIN 1u B 1608 D7 FB218 0uH R230 150 S/H,AGC,A/D CONVERTER S2.0/P0 S0.9/P0 B 1608 43 CD_GND CD_GND 44 D7(D9) IC202 CLPREF/L+1 D8 FB219 0uH R231 150 S0.6/P0 AD80044JSTRL S1.1/P0 C210 FB226 45 CA_HD CA_FD 46 HALL_GAIN D8(D10) CLPOUT/L+2 1u 0uH B 1608D9 FB220 0uH R232 150 S0.7/P0 3.0 47 CAM_-7.5V CAM_3.1V 48 CCD_TEMP 2 TO(1/3) D9(D11) ACVDD D10 FB221 0uH R233 150 S0.2/P0 49 CAM_15V CAM_3.1V 50 CAM_3.1V D10(D12) ACVSS FB225 0uH D11 FB222 0uH R234 150 0 51 CAM_5V CAM_3.1V 52 D11 ACVSS TEST0 D5 C209 53 CAMTEST0 CA_AD05 54 (D13) 0.1u

E TEST1 D6 B55 CAMTEST1 CA_AD06 56

D0 D7 57 CA_AD00 CA_AD07 58 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 D1 D8 59 CA_AD01 CA_AD08 60 D2 D9 10 61 CA_AD02 CA_AD09 62 C2251u D3 D10 63 CA_AD03 CA_AD10 64 B 1608 D4 D11 65 CA_AD04 CA_AD11 66 C224FB209 0uH 0.1u 67 REG_GND PBLK 68 D201 B XX 1005 69 REG_GND CLPOB 70

F R210 SIGNAL PATHXX VIDEO SIGNAL

R220 C232 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMAXX XX Q201

XX

FB203 REC 0uH

PB

R203 R206FB208 R207 * 2200 R202 0uH 100 100

G X202XX

R212 220 C201 0.1u R214 X201 B 220 XX R204 1608XX R246 R205 * R244 XX FB207 10 XX FB204

XX

C217 0.01u

H B

36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 CCD_OUT H2 *MARKED:MOUNT TABLE H1 C204 MVC-CD200 MVC-CD300 0.1u RG

B

120p V1B C205 XX 16V 1005 V1B CH TEST1 VSS5 V1A V1A 120p VM ADCLK V2 5 TO(3/3)

I C216 XX 16V V2 V2CH V2 CLPOB V3B

V4 V3B FB201 0uH 10uH V4 IC201 VSS4 V3AV1A V3A FB202 XX 0uH C230 V1A CLPDM V4 0.1u TIMING GENERATOR V4 FB205 0uH 10uH VH PBLK C206B VSHT V1B 1608 0.1u VSHT IC201 CXD2470R-T CXD2497R-T V1B IC201 XRS B V3A * 1608 CAM_15V L201 XX 47uH C229 V3A XSHD 0.1u CAM_-7.5V L203 10uH 47uH B VL XSHP V3B 1005 R201 R201 0 XX V3B VDD4

J *VSHT 1608R203 220 100 SUB VDD3

R216 0 XX TEST2 H2 C228 FB201 R217 0 XX 6.8u * 35V C205 R207 0 XX *TA C CH C203 R246 XX 0 C231 1u22u 16V C202

B

R247 0 XX TA B 47u R219 6.3V 100k12345678910 11 12 TA B

K CD_GND 6 TO(1/3,3/3)

C226 C223 R216 R217 C218 47u 0.1u * * 0.1u C216L203 6.3VBB* R247 * FB210 TA B 1005± 10% 0uH 1005* FB205 * L201 FB202 R250 C233 * 1k* XX FB206 0uH

L CAMERA PROCESS

4-13 4-14 CD-333 (2/3)/CD-334 (2/3) 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 VSS1 VSS6 RST HDI DSGAT VDI ID SEN WEN SCK EBCKSM SSI VDD1 MCKO VDD2 VDD5 RG OSCI VSS2 OSCO VSS3 CKI H1 CKO 12 11 109876543213.1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 DRVDD SCLK (D1) R238 XX C207 XX DRVSS (D0)SDATA 3.1 DVSS3 SEN R215 S1.6/P0 3.1 XX ADCCLK (SCLK)SDL 3.0 S0.1 DVDD1 (SDATA)SLM P0.4 3.0 3.1 HD/DVDD RST 3.0 3.0 R209 XX PBLK (CA_FD)TRI S3.0/P0 R208 CLPOB SVSS XX S2.3/P0 3.0 XSHP SVDD S2.3/P0 C221 1u B XSHD VRB S3.0/P0 S1.1 CLPDM VRT O0 3.0 S2.1 VD/AVDD CMLVL P0 3.0 (LACHI _SEL) 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36,

MVC-CD200/CD300 For Schematic Diagram For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-7 for CD-333 printed wiring board. • Refer to page 4-9 for CD-334 printed wiring board. • Refer to page 4-73 for waveforms. • Refer to page 4-73 for waveforms. 1234567812345678

CD-333 BOARD(3/3) (MVC-CD200) CD-334 BOARD(3/3) (MVC-CD300) CCD IMAGER(CCD BLOCK) NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE CCD IMAGER(CCD BLOCK) NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE SIGNAL PATH A S :STILL MODE-REF.NO.:1000 SERIES- A -REF.NO.:1000 SERIES- P :PB MODE VIDEO SIGNAL

XX MARK:NO MOUNT L101 XX MARK:NO MOUNTQ102 100uH 2SC4178-F13F14-T1 BUFFER SIGNAL PATH L401 100uH Q402 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA2SC4178-F13F14-T1 ± 10% 14.6 2520 BUFFER S14.5/P0 CAM_15V CAM_15V REC 10.4 VIDEO SIGNAL S10.5/P0

PB

CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA 4 9.7 CCD_OUT CCD_OUT

REC

V1B V1B C409 10p

B V1A PB B CH R407V1A 1005 4700

V2 C111 R108 V2 10p V3B 4700CH 1005 V3B 1005 S-7.3/P0 V3A V3A R405 S-7.3/P0 XX V4 10.4-7.2 V4 1005 4 S-7.3/P0212345678212345678910 5 TO(2/3) 5 TO(2/3)

C135IC101 C IC4011375

CCD IMAGER CCD IMAGER7620 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 S2.3/P0 S14.5/P0 16 15 14 13 12 11 1097R102 15 1005 R401 0 1005 H2 14.6 H2

D R103

15 1005 R402 0 1005 H1 C106 0.1u C109 D H1 16V R406 1005B 1608 0.1u 68 R104 68 1005 16V RG RG R413B 1608 47CAM_-7.5V CAM_-7.5V FB401 C404 C407 1005 C408 R107 FB101 D101 MA111-(K8).S0 0uH 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u220k 0uH 16V1005 D401 50V R404 16V MA111-(K8).S0 B 3216 B 1608 1M B 1608 VSHT C107 VSHT 1005 C102 C105 2200pC101 B C413 C412 1u C103 C104 R101 0.1u C108 1608 1u25V 6.8u 0.01u 50V 25V C401 C402 C403 R409 R403 2200p B 35V 22u 16V 100k R105 B 0.1u 6.8u 22u 0.1u 100k 2700 C405 B TA C 16V B 1005 2200 B 3216 8.2 10V 35V 16V 10V 1005 1005 0.1u 1608 TA B 1005 1005 B TA C TABB1005 S10.0/P0 10V

E 1005 B

4 1005TO(2/3) VSUB_CONTE4TO(2/3(CN203)) VSUB_CONT006TO(1/3,2/3) CD_GND 6 TO(1/3,2/3) CD_GND Q101 Q401 UN9213J-(K8).SO UN9213J-(K8).SO INV. INV.

Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager

F • The CD-333 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped • The CD-334 board mounted as a repair part is not equippedwith a CCD imager. F with a CCD imager. When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the old one and mount it onto the new one. old one and mount it onto the new one. • If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the • If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the adjustments for the camera section. adjustments for the camera section. • As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from • As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from

G its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC. G its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.

In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts nor exposed to strong light. nor exposed to strong light. 16 16

CCD IMAGER CD-333 (3/3)/CD-334 (3/3) 4-15 4-16

IC101 ICX284AQ-13 H2 V4 1.3 H1 V3A 1.8 -7.2 RG V3B 12.8 -7.2 VL V2 8.3 -7.5 -0.2 R106 22 1005 CSUB V1A -0.2 VSHT V1B 7.8 -0.2 GND GND VDD VOUT IC401 ICX262AQ-13 H2 V4 H1 V3A S2.5/P0 VL V3B S-7.5/P0 CSUB S-0.1/P0V2 S10.0/P0 S-0.1/P0 SUB V1A S10.0/P0 S-0.1/P0 GND V1B S2.5/P0 H1 TEST S2.3/P0 H2 TEST S12.5/P0 RG GND

VDD VOUT

S10.5/ S9.7/P0,

MVC-CD200/CD300 TK-61 (LENS CAP DETECT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. TK-61 Board; 6,000 Series — 1234567

TK-61 BOARD LENS CAP DETECT A -REF.NO.:6000 SERIES- R511 FP-3700 5P

XX MARK:NO MOUNT CN503 FLEXIBLE 1 CAM_P_5V R503 R512 2 CAM_P_5VNO MARK:STILL/PB MODE003N,C LED901 CN501 5P IC501 4 PRELAMP_LED (PRELAMP)XX TO CAM_P_5V 1 R502 R505 SY-67 BOARD(9/10) 22k XX 3.5 5 PRELAMP_LED CN703 PRELAMP_AF_ON 2 3.5 Q501 THROUGH THE R504 HN1C01FU-TE85R FP-309 FLEXIBLE LENS_CAP_OPEN30LED DRIVE

B (SEE PAGE 4-39) REG_GND400R509

SELF_TIMER 5 10k Q502 R506 0 XX 82 R510 R508R507 10k 120 1k

C

S502 (LENS CAP DETECT) MVC-CD300 For printed wiring board • TK-61 board consists of multiple layers. However, only SY-67LD, PEARL, VIDEO OUT, SH, 16M FLASH MEMORY, the sides (layers) A and B are shown. 64M SDRAM, CLK GEN, CW, HI CONTROL, AUDIO PROCESS, DC/DC CONVERTER, • Chip parts FLASH UNIT TransistorC654TK-61BE123(LENS CAP DETECT)

There are a few cases that the part printed on

this diagram isn’t mounted in this model. Schematic diagram and printed wiring board of the SY-67 and MD-083 boards are not shown. CD-334 (CD300) Pages from 4-19 to 4-54 are not shown. (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER)

LENS CAP DETECT

4-17 4-18 TK-6132145,

MVC-CD200/CD300 FS-83 (CHARGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. FS-83 Board; 1,000 Series — 123456

CONTROL SWITCH A BLOCK(ZK-503)

S001 (MODE SWITCH) 1 (P_AUTO) (PLAY) A 2 S(AE-S) (MOVIE) R005 4k R001 6 10 20k SET UP (SET UP) A(AE-A) CAM_3.1V 14B3

B R003 R006MODE_DIAL 13 24k 6k

5 4 XSET_UP 12 SCN(SCENE) M(MANUAL) XPB_ON 11 N.C 10 R004 10k GND 9 TO N.C 8 SY-67 BOARD(9/10) CN705 XPOWER_ON 7 (SEE PAGE S003 S002N.C 6 R00820k POWER (EXEC)C 4-39) CAM_3.1V 5 ON/OFF(CHG) KEY_AD3 4 GND 3 DIAL_A 2 DIAL_B 1

D

R002 R007 4400 6600 S004 S005 LND001 (ZOOM) STATICS_GNDWT

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(ZK-503)is replaced as a block. So the PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted. E For printed wiring board

MD-083 • Refer to page 4-79 for parts location. CD-RF PROCESS, SERVO, CD, DSP, • FS-83 board consists of multiple layers. However, only CD-R/RW GA, MD SYSTEM CONTROL,EFM/ENC CONTROL the sides (layers) A and B are shown. PK-58 • Chip parts (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT)

Transistor Diode

C3BE21FS-83 (CHARGER)

There are a few cases that the part printed on

this diagram isn’t mounted in this model. JK-208 (USB INTERFACE) CD-333 (CD200) (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK / CHARGERZK-503 FS-83 4-55 4-56

,

MVC-CD200/CD300 For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-56 for printed wiring board. 12345678910

FS-83 BOARD NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE CHARGER A -REF.NO.:1000 SERIES- C001 C002 XX MARK:NO MOUNT XX XXB B

CN004 14P CN002 3P LF001 1 REG_GND ACV_UNREG 1 J901 Q002 2 REG_GND ACV_GND 2 TPC8305(TE12L) R013 DC IN SWITCH 10 R014 3 REG_GND BATT/XEXT323216 1k F001 FB002 R004 7.9 8.4 1.4A 4 REG_GND 0uH 1k 32V R003 8.1177.7 F002 5 P_4.6VXX TO

B 2W 8 1.4A 6 P_4.6V32V SY-67(10/10) BOARD2012 R006 5 Q003 CN001

0 2SB1122-ST-TD 7 D_4.6V/1.8V LND001 2W R00836CHARGE SWITCH F003 THROUGH THE 2012 470k 1.4A 8 D_4.6V/1.8V FP-136 FLEXIBLE STATIC_GND D007 R015 32V 1SS357-TPH3 6800 (SEE PAGE 4-41)7.949HI_UNREG F004 D006 1.4A MA8120-TX 10 D_3.4V/3.2V0 32V C004 11 D_3.4V/3.2VF005 D003 0.022u 1.7 1.4A B 12 ST_UNREGMAZT082H08S0 Q004 32V UN9213J-(K8).SO 13 ST_UNREG CHARGE SWITCH

C CN003 3P 14 BATT_UNREG7.9

BT901 BATT_UNREG 1 FB0010uH R010 F006 1M 1.4A BATTERY 0S 32VTERMINAL BATT_SIG 2 Q001 C005 BATT_GND 3 SSM3K03FE(TPL3) R016 XX SWITCH 47k B S002 MENU S001 (FLASH)

D R011

CN001 11P REG_GND 1 BATT_SIG 2 UP RIGHT REG_GND 3 R017 470k SET SET (EDIT SERACH) S (MACRO) TO BATT/XEXT 4 SY-67(9/10) BOARD CN708 FAST_CHARGE 5 R005 R007 R009 180 2200 3300 THROUGH THE

E FP-362 FLEXIBLE

INIT_CHARGE 6 LEFT DOWN (SEE PAGE 4-40) D_3.4V 7 (SELF TIMER) REG_GND 8 R012 POWER_LED 9 D004TLGU1008(T05,SOY) KEY_AD0 10 (POWER) KEY_AD1 11 FB003 C003 Note : Note : XX 2200p The components identified by Les composants identifiés par B mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques

F D001 D002XX MAZT082H08S0 LND002 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité.

STATIC_GND Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une D005 specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

XX CHARGER

4-57 4-58 FS-83 8.1 8.4 8.4,

MVC-CD200/CD300 JK-208 (USB INTERFACE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. JK-208 Board; 2,000 Series — For printed wiring board MD-083 • Refer to page 4-79 for parts location. CD-RF PROCESS, SERVO, CD, DSP, • JK-208 board consists of multiple layers. However, only CD-R/RW GA, MD SYSTEM CONTROL,EFM/ENC CONTROL the sides (layers) A and B are shown. PK-58 • Chip parts (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT) Transistor DiodeC3BE21FS-83 (CHARGER)

There are a few cases that the part printed on

this diagram isn’t mounted in this model. JK-208 (USB INTERFACE) CD-333 (CD200) (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER)

USB INTERFACE

JK-208 4-59 4-60,

MVC-CD200/CD300 For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-59 for printed wiring board. 12345678910 11 12

JK-208 BOARD FB102 0uH 4

J101

USB INTERFACE FB103 0uH A 0uH 2 ACC

FB104 3 -REF.NO.:2000 SERIES- R103 R104 100k 1M FB105 0uH

XX MARK:NO MOUNT FB106 0uH NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE

0 0.3 3.3 R109 Q102 470k C106Q101 D103 D106 UN9213J-(K8).SO UN9113J-(K8).SO D114 D109 MAZT082H08S0 XXMAZT082H08S0 D111MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 B SWITCH ACC BT MA111-(K8).S0 3.3 SWITCH

B

R110 LF101 R108 220k CN102 5P 330k341VCC212D- (USB) 3 D+ 344ID21LF102 5 GND CN101 27P

C EXT_STROB_ON 1

REG_GND 2 D107 R112C104 0 LANC_SIG 3 XX XX D102 D104 1608 LND101 REG_GND 4 MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 R111 1k STATIC_GNDXLANC_JACK_IN 5 LANC_DC 6 FB107 0uH J102 TO USB_DET 7 A/V OUT SY-67 BOARD(9/10) FB108 0uH (MONO) CN709 AV_JACK_IN 8

D THROUGH THE C102 C103FP-361 FLEXIBLE REG_GND 9 XX XX

(SEE PAGE 4-40) V_OUT 10 CH

CH

FB109 0uH REG_GND 11 A_OUT 12 Q103UN9113J-(K8).SO C105 D112 REG_GND 13 SWITCH XXB MA111-(K8).S0 3.3 D105 D108 D110 D_3.4V 14 1608MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 FB101 VDD 15 0uH 3.1 USB_D+PULLUP 16 IC101 PDIUSBP11APW,118

E USB_D+OUT 17 3.3 0.4

USB_D-OUT 18 MODE VCC R107 3.1 0 1500 USB_TXENL 19 FB110 OE# VMO/FSEO SIGNAL PATH 1MH 0 3.1 USB_XVDATA 20 FB111 RCV VPO R106 1MH 0 0.4 24 VIDEO SIGNAL USB_D+IN 21 FB112 VP USB_D+ AUDIO 1MH 0 0.4 USB_D-IN 22 VM USB_D- CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL 3.1 3.3 R105 USB_SUSPND 23 SUSPND SPEED 24

REC

REG_GND 24 GND (NC) C101 C108 0.1u 22uF XEJECT 25 B 6.3V PBTA XLID_OPEN 26 R115 VL_3V 27 1k R113 IC101 33 S102 USB I/F

OPEN

C107 0.1u R114 B S101 S103 BT101 1M (LITHIUM BATTERY)

G

(OPEN/CLOSE) D101 D113 XX 16 MAZT082H08S0

USB INTERFACE

4-61 4-62 JK-20876543218910 11 12 13 14,

MVC-CD200/CD300 PK-58 (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. PK-58 Board; 4,000 Series — For printed wiring board • Refer to page 4-79 for parts location. • PK-58 board consists of multiple layers. However, only the sides (layers) A and B are shown. • Chip parts Transistor DiodeC6543BE12321

There are a few cases that the part printed on

this diagram isn’t mounted in this model. MD-083 CD-RF PROCESS, SERVO, CD, DSP, CD-R/RW GA, MD SYSTEM CONTROL, EFM/ENC CONTROL PK-58 (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT) FS-83 (CHARGER) JK-208 (USB INTERFACE) CD-333 (CD200) (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER)

RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT

PK-58 4-64,

MVC-CD200/CD300

(EXPOSURE) (SPOT METER) RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT 4-65 PK-58,

MVC-CD200/CD300 For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-63 for printed wiring board. • Refer to page 4-74 for waveforms. 12345678910 11 12 13

PK-58 BOARD(1/3) NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE RGB DRIVE(RGB BLOCK) A -REF.NO.:4000 SERIES- XX MARK:NO MOUNT

D304 TLAU1008(T05,SOY) R322 /CHG 470k(AMBER) R307 470 C311R316 R318 L302R311 10u 10uH BL_LEV R313 22k 15k 12k 10V ± 10% BL_LEV 4 TO(3/3) Q0301 3.0 47k TA UN9213J-(K8).SO R319

B LED DRIVE L301 R312

P_4.9V 5 TO(2/3) R317 39k R324 100uH C309 12k 33k XX ± 10% 0.1u C313 CN301 32P 0 0.1u CHARGE_LED 32 KEY_AD2 31 IC301 C30747u6.3V HI_UNREG 2.0 C312 HI_UNREG 30 TA BEVR 10u LANC_IN 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 10V LANC_IN 29 IC301 LANC_OUT MB40D001PFV-G-BND-ER TA A LANC_OUT 28 C3050.1u 3.2 3.2 REG_GND 27 VDD BRT_TST

C MS_SCLKMS_SCLK 26 3.3

MS_BS VCC P_MUTE 6 MS_BS 25 C306 2.5 MS_DI0 0.1u H_REV 3.3 2.2 BL_LEV C308 COM_BLK B_OUT VBMS_DIO 24 H_REV BL_LEVEL 0.1u 3.2 2.0 C314 VDD 1.3 XTEST B_DC_DET 1uVDD 23 V_REV 3.3 V-COM 2.1 2.5 1608 V_REV V-COM BRIGHT 5 G_OUT VG BL_UNREG 22 2.2 2.0 NTSC 3.3 2.0 VCO CONTRAST IC302 G_DC_DET C315 BL_UNREG 21 BL_UNREG NTSC VCO COM-O 2.5 1u COM_OUT RGB DRIVE R_OUT VR BL_GND 20 BL_GND 1 TO(3/3) COMTST 0 1.5 COM_ADJ 3.8 2.0 COMTST COM_ADJ SUB_CON_B IC302 4 R_DC_DET C316 COM-O BL_GND 19 PANEL_4.9V IR3Y37A4 1u1608 COM-OD 3.0 2.3 AMP SUB_CON_R GND1XCAM_SCK 18 CLK RGB_AMP 2.2 TO VCC1 GND2 FRPV SY-67 BOARD(3/10) CAM_SO 17 0.3 2.2 FRPVSI OSD_B SYNC_OUT CN707 CONT FRPTXCS_PANEL_D/A 16 3.2 FRPT THROUGH THE 1.6 BRT_B OSD_G SYNC_IN FP-363 FLEXIBLE PANEL_-15.3V 15 PANEL_-15.3V SO BRT_B R310 4.6OSD_R EXT_BGP P_XHD (SEE PAGE PANEL_13.2V 14 PANEL_13.2V 3.1 2.2 BRT_R 0 0XEN BRT_R BLACK_IN 4-27) 123SYNC_SEP COMTSTPANEL_4.9V 13 PANEL_4.9V COMTST 2 TO(2/3) 3.2 1.6 COLOR NTSC PANEL_6.5V 12 VDDA COLOR NTSC V_REV PANEL_3.4V 11 PANEL_3.4V 2.1 V_REV

E VSS BRIGHT H_REV 6 TO(2/3)D_3.4V 10 D_3.4V H_REV

V-COM REG_GND 9 FB301 V-COM0uH C302 0.01u12345678910 11 12 VCO PANEL_Y 8 VCO FB302 0uH C303 0.01u PANEL_R-Y 7 FB303 0uH C304 0.01u COLOR PANEL_B-Y 6 R314 XX R321 REG_GND 5 10k PANEL_V 4 PANEL_V 3 TO(2/3) R315 C310 XX R320HDO 3 HDO 0.1u

F 100kRESET 2 REG_GND

R303 ACCESS_LED 1 680 S305 D302 TLSU1008(T05,SOY) (RED) R323 RESET 470k ACCESS LED W_MSK CN302 18P 1 N,C

G 2 N,C

S301 S303 S306 DISPLAY R304 AE LOCK R308 + (EXPOSURE) R309 3 N,C 2200 3300 6800 4 REG_GND 5 N,C R467 4.7k 6 N,C HSY 7 HSY 7 TO(2/3) PANEL_COM 8 PANEL_COM CPC R306 9 VG (FOR CHECK)

H S304 22k S307 SIGNAL PATH HI_UNREG 10 HI_UNREG

(SPOT METER) FOCUS LANC_IN 11 LANC_IN

VIDEO SIGNAL LANC_OUT

12 LANC_OUT

CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA 13 MAKER_RECOG

D301 MS_SCLK 14 MS_SCLK MAZT082H08S0 REC MS_BS 15 MS_BS C301 MS_DI0 FB304 2200p D303 PB 16 MS_DIO LND301 XX B 1SS352-TPH3

I 1608

17 N,C

VDD

STATIC_GND 18 VDD

RGB DRIVE PK-58 (1/3) 4-67 4-68

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 1312345678910 11 12 COM_ADJ 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 PICTURE COM_BLK_LVL 1.9 Y/CR/XRGB_SW COM_AMP 3.2 1.1 AGC_FIL GAMMA2 0.8 AGC_OUT GAMMA0 2.2 BRT_R AGC_LVL SUB_BRT_R 1.5 BRT_B COLOR SUB_BRT_B 1.6 2.3 H_FIL_IN AMPRGB_AMP 2.4 FRPV G/Y FRP 1.9 2.4 FRPT R/R-Y/CR COM_FRP 2.1 B/B-Y/CB OUT_LIM 2.1 4.9 H_FIL VSH 7.5 REG_OUT VCC2 1.2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24,

MVC-CD200/CD300 For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-63 for printed wiring board. 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15

PK-58 BOARD(2/3) NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE S :STILL MODE TIMING GENERATOR(TG BLOCK) P :PB MODE A -REF.NO.:4000 SERIES- XX MARK:NO MOUNT Q401-Q404COM DRIVE

5 SIGNAL PATHTO(1/3) P_4.9V L401 10uH R402 ± 10% XX VIDEO SIGNAL PANEL_13.2V R435 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMAPANEL_-15.3V L402 R429 Q403 33 10uH

B ± 10% IC402

IC402 100k 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO ± 0.5% NJM062V(TE2) REC12.9 1.8 C415 2.5 12.9 R436 0.01uVCO OUT1 VCC+ 22k C417 C419 16V 0.1u PB R411 Q402R425 ± 5%

XX B

10k C411 2.4 1.3 1.3 100k 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO 2 TO(1/3) L403 C409 560p IN1- OUT2CH R437 10uH R403 C407 0.1u 1608 0.3 Q4041.3 33k± 10% 0 0.001u 2.4 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO ± 0.5%IN1+ IN2- 12.9 C416 C418 PANEL_4.9V 1u 1u R408 L405 -10.6 0.3FFL404 680k 6.8uH 1.3 C414 R440 XX VCC- IN2+ 2012 2012 2520 0.8 6.8u 16V PANEL_3.4V R417 A R441 R414 R416 TA

C 1M 68k

68k XX D_3.4V R428 R438 C402 100k 22C405 R422 -10.6 ± 0.5% R442 C401 2.2u 4700 0 XX 25V 0.1u R409 C406 TA A 120k 0.1u R412 D402 1M MA8047-H-TX C413 R443 C408 R432 XX 82p R415 R418 R421 R426 R433 1u 100k CH 22k 47k 4700 33k 33k

B

REG_GND R439 VB XX R444 VB 0

VG VG VR D VR CN401 24PTG_24 R445 0

24 CLD TG_23 R446 0 23 SPD V-COM TG_22 R447 0 V-COM 22 CTR COM-O C4040.1u R404 TG_21 R448 0 COM-O 47k 21 EX3 VCO TG_20 R449 0 VCO 20 EX2 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 6 TO(1/3) 19 VB12 TG_18 18 RES R450 XX

E R430 17 TSTXX TG_12

R434 16 VR P_XHD R405 P_XHD 47k 2.700TG_24 15 VG LCD901 W_MSK SYNI CLD R451 XX COLOR W_MSK 0.5 SYNC TG_23 14 VB LCD NTSC SPD R452 XX UNIT NTSC 4.9 2.4 TG_22 13 GNDWIDE CTR 2.5INCH COMTST 0 TG_21 12 VSH COMTST PDPC EX3 R453 V_REV NTSC 3.3 V_REV NTPC1 IC401 4.9 TG_20 XX 11 COMEX2 H_REV 3.0 0.4 R454 10 VGL H_REV TESTI

F TIMING GENERATOR

TESTO XX FRPV C403 4.9 2.4 TG_18 9 VSSFRPV TEST0.1u RES TG_17 16V V_REV 3.3 IC401 4.9 TG_17 8 MO2 R401 R410 VREVCB LZ9GH234 MODE2 TG_16 XX 100k 4.9 4.9 7 MO1 FRPT TESTI TG_16 MODE1 TG_15 FRPT H_REV 3.306GPCK HREVC TG_15EX1 TG_14 HDO COMTST 0 4.8 5 SPS COMTST TG_14SPS 3 TG_13TO(1/3) 4.9 3.9 4 CLS LOWI TG_13CLS R455 3 VCC PANEL_V02VSH

G 1 VGH

12345678910 11 12 TG_12 2.4 R431 R419 R420 R427 XXR406 XX 68k 33k 0± 0.5% ± 0.5% PANEL_COM C412 7 TO(1/3) 82p

H CH HSY TIMING GENERATOR

4-69 4-70 PK-58

VCO

D401 1SV290(TPL3) 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 4.9 BLKI P16 2.4 BLKO VSEPC P_XHD 4.6 3.0 BGPO P15 0 4.94321HSY MUT 2.4 VSY PDP VIN GND 4.9 GND VDD 4.9 SYNO TST2 R4245678W_MSK XX 4.9WIDOV TST1 0 2.4 WIDOT OSCI FRPV 3.4 2.3 Q401 FRPV OSCO 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO FRPT 2.4 FRPT TESTO -10.6 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 COM-O V-COM R456 XX R457 XX R458 0 R459 0 R460 XX R461 47 VG R462 47 VB R463 47 VR R464 XX R465 XX R466 XX,

MVC-CD200/CD300 For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-63 for printed wiring board. 12345678910

PK-58 BOARD(3/3) NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE BACK LIGHT(BL BLOCK) A -REF.NO.:4000 SERIES- Q206FP102-TL R217 XX MARK:NO MOUNT 1800L201 Q204 SWITCHING L202 5L203

22uH 1/10W4.7uH 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO 100uH 2012 2520 SWITCHING 3 5.68.2 1 BL_UNREG 4 7.72126R207 8.2 3 22k R2181800 CN201 10P 1/10W 5.4 5.4 201245C214 4 10 10 BL_HIGHC216

B 7.9030.015u1 2012 T201 12p 9 N.C.1 TO(1/3) 7.7

C202 Q209 3kV R206 C206 R208 C209 FP216-TL -0.9

INVERTER

TANSFORMER SL 8 N.C.22u 560 18p 16V 560 27p INVERTER 2 C203 CH CH TA B TRANS DRIVE 7 N.C. ND901 0.22u BACK LIGHT F C211 C212 6 N.C. D201 33u XX 10V 1uF5N.C.TA B BL_GND Q202 Q210 4 N.C. UN9112J-(K8).SO UN9112J-(K8).SO 3 BL_LOW 4.9 B+ SWITCH 4.8 4.8 LED DRIVE PANEL_4.9V 2 LED D901 0 R223 (STARTER)

C IC201 120 1 LED_GNDR210 C210

10k XX R205 SELECT SWITCH ±0.5% 4.8 120k LND201 ±0.5% R209 SHIELD_GND 4.8 4700 LND202 4.1 1.0 C208 0 0.01u R219 SHIELD_GND1234B100k R215 C2070.022u R21147k B 1800 ±0.5%

D Q201UN9214J-(K8).SO SWITCH

C201 2.2 0.01uB IC202 Q207 HN1C01FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) CURRENT DETECT 0.9 1.08765D202 1.8 MA111-(K8).S0

E 0 0

0.4 4.8 0.3 R203 C204 R2122.5 R216 0 6800 2.2u 3300 4700 C213 R220 R221 C215 R2226.3V ±0.5%±0.5% IC202 0.1u 6800 22k 0.1u 470TA A NJM2406F-TE2BBR204 C205 Q205 R213 R214 Q208 27k 2.2u UN9213J-(K8).SO 1500 1500 UN9213J-(K8).SO ±0.5% F SWITCH SWITCH 4 TO(1/3) BL_LEV

F

Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

F BACK LIGHT

PK-58 (3/3) 4-71 4-72 IC201 TL5001CDR GND OUT 0.9 RT VCC 2.4 0 DTC FB SCP IN Q203 UN9213J-(K8).SO PROTECT SW 0.6 0.9 4.854123,

MVC-CD200/CD300

4-3. WAVEFORMS

CD-333 BOARD CD-334 BOARD

1 IC101 1,3 9 IC202 qh 1 IC401 1,3 9 IC202 qh 2µsec 3.475µsec 7.5Vp-p 7.5Vp-p 100µsec 3.4Vp-p 124µsec 3.4Vp-p54nsec 54nsec 2 IC101 2 q; IC202 w; 2 IC401 2 q; IC202 w; 24.0Vp-p 3.1Vp-p 22.0Vp-p 3.1Vp-p 33.3msec 124µsec 33.3msec 124µsec 3 IC101 4,6 qa CN203 rs 3 IC401 4,6 qa CN203 rs 124µsec 7.5Vp-p 7.5Vp-p 3.475µsec 100µsec 2µsec 4.4Vp-p 3.2Vp-p54nsec 54.7nsec 4 IC10154IC401 5 24.0Vp-p 22.0Vp-p 33.3msec 33.3msec 5 IC10185IC401 q; 1.0Vp-p 1.0Vp-p 33.3msec 124µsec 6 IC101 qf 6 IC401 qs 54nsec 3.7Vp-p 54nsec 3.7Vp-p 7 IC101 qg,qh 7 IC401 qd,qf,ql,w; 54nsec 3.6Vp-p 54nsec 4.7Vp-p 8 IC202 e; 8 IC202 e; 1.0Vp-p 33.3msec 1.0Vp-p124µsec

WAVEFORMS

4-73 CD-333, CD-334,

MVC-CD200/CD300 PK-58 BOARD

1 IC302 8 0.5Vp-p

H

2 IC302 9 0.2Vp-p

H

3 IC302 q; 0.2Vp-p

H

4 IC302 w; 4.5Vp-p 2H 5 IC302 ws 4.5Vp-p 2H 6 IC302 wf 4.5Vp-p 2H

WAVEFORMS

PK-58 4-74, Waveforms and parts location of the SY-67 and MD-083 boards are not shown. Pages from 4-75 to 4-77 are not shown.,

MVC-CD200/CD300

4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION no mark : side A * mark : side B

CD-333 BOARD CD-334 BOARD

C101 D-4 FB101 C-2 * R219 C-8 C201 B-4 FB203 B-4 R225 B-3 C102 C-3 * FB201 B-7 * R220 B-9 * C202 A-7 * FB204 B-8 R226 B-3 C103 C-2 * FB202 A-7 R221 B-3 * C203 B-8 * FB205 B-7 R227 B-3 C104 C-3 FB203 B-4 R222 B-3 * C204 B-8 * FB206 B-7 R228 B-3 C105 C-3 * FB204 B-8 R223 B-3 * C205 B-7 * FB207 B-8 R229 B-3 * C106 B-7 * FB205 B-7 R224 B-3 * C206 B-8 * FB208 B-8 R230 B-3 C107 C-4 * FB206 B-7 R225 B-3 * C207 B-8 FB209 A-3 R231 B-3 C108 C-4 * FB207 B-8 R226 B-3 C208 B-4 * FB210 A-9 R232 B-3 C109 C-4 * FB208 B-8 R227 B-3 C209 B-4 FB211 B-2 R233 B-3 C111 C-4 FB209 A-3 R228 B-3 C210 B-4 FB212 B-2 R234 B-3 C201 B-4 * FB210 A-8 R229 B-3 C211 B-4 FB213 B-2 R235 B-2 * C202 A-7 FB211 B-3 R230 B-3 C212 B-4 FB214 B-2 R236 B-2 * C203 B-7 FB212 B-3 R231 B-3 C213 B-4 FB215 B-2 * R237 B-7 * C204 B-8 FB213 B-3 R232 B-3 C214 B-4 FB216 B-3 * R238 B-7 * C205 B-7 FB214 B-3 R233 B-3 C215 B-4 FB217 B-3 * R239 B-7 * C206 B-8 FB215 B-3 R234 B-3 * C216 B-7 FB218 A-3 * R240 B-7 * C207 B-8 FB216 B-3 R235 B-3 * C217 B-8 FB219 A-3 * R241 B-7 C208 B-4 FB217 A-3 R236 B-3 * C218 B-7 FB220 A-2 R242 B-3 C209 B-4 FB218 A-3 * R237 B-7 C219 B-4 FB221 A-3 * R244 B-8 C210 B-4 FB219 A-3 * R238 B-7 C220 B-4 FB222 A-2 * R245 B-7 C211 B-4 FB220 A-3 * R239 B-7 C221 B-3 FB223 B-3 * R246 A-8 C212 B-4 FB221 A-3 * R240 B-7 C222 B-3 FB224 B-2 * R247 A-8 C213 B-4 FB222 A-2 * R241 B-7 * C223 B-7 FB225 B-2 R248 D-2 C214 B-4 FB223 B-3 R242 B-3 C224 B-3 FB226 B-2 R249 D-2 C215 B-4 FB224 B-3 * R244 B-8 C225 B-3 FB301 A-2 * R250 C-8 * C216 B-7 FB225 B-2 * R245 B-7 * C226 A-8 FB302 A-3 R303 C-1 * C217 B-8 FB226 B-2 * R246 A-8 * C227 A-8 FB303 A-3 R304 C-1 * C218 B-7 * R247 A-8 * C228 C-8 FB304 A-3 * R305 C-8 C219 B-4 * IC101 C-6 R248 D-2 * C229 C-8 FB305 A-4 R306 C-2 C220 B-4 * IC201 B-8 R249 D-2 * C230 C-8 FB306 A-4 R307 C-2 C221 B-4 IC202 B-3 * R250 C-7 * C231 C-8 FB307 A-4 R308 C-2 C222 B-3 * IC301 D-8 R303 C-1 * C232 B-9 FB308 A-4 R309 C-2 * C223 B-7 * IC302 C-9 R304 C-2 * C233 C-8 FB401 C-2 R310 A-4 C224 A-3 IC303 C-2 * R305 C-8 * C234 C-8 * R311 C-8 C225 A-3 IC304 D-2 R306 C-2 C301 C-1 * IC201 B-8 R312 C-2 * C226 A-8 R307 C-2 C302 C-1 IC202 B-3 R313 A-4 * C227 A-8 L101 C-4 R308 C-2 C303 C-2 * IC301 D-8 R314 D-2 * C228 B-8 * L201 A-7 R309 C-2 C304 C-2 * IC302 C-9 * R315 C-8 * C229 B-8 * L202 A-8 * R311 C-8 C305 D-2 IC303 C-2 R316 C-2 * C230 B-8 * L203 A-8 R312 C-2 C306 D-2 IC304 D-2 * R317 C-8 * C231 C-8 * L301 D-9 R314 D-2 * C307 D-9 * IC401 C-6 R318 C-2 * C232 B-9 * L302 D-9 * R315 C-8 * C308 D-9 R319 D-2 * C233 C-7 L303 C-2 R316 C-2 * C309 C-9 * L201 A-8 R320 C-2 * C234 B-8 L304 C-1 * R317 C-8 * C310 C-9 * L202 B-8 R321 D-2 C301 C-1 R318 C-2 * C311 D-9 * L203 A-9 R322 D-2 C302 C-2 Q101 C-3 R319 D-2 C312 D-2 * L301 D-9 R323 C-2 C303 C-2 Q102 C-4 R320 C-2 C313 C-2 * L302 D-9 R324 C-2 C304 C-2 * Q201 B-9 R321 D-2 C314 D-2 L303 C-2 R325 C-2 C305 D-2 Q301 C-1 R322 D-2 C315 D-2 L304 C-1 R326 D-2 C306 C-2 * Q302 C-8 R323 C-2 C316 D-2 L401 C-4 R327 C-2 * C307 D-8 Q303 D-2 R324 C-3 C317 C-2 R328 D-2 * C308 D-9 R325 C-2 C318 D-2 * Q201 B-9 R329 D-2 * C309 C-9 R101 C-4 R326 D-3 C319 C-2 Q301 C-1 R330 D-2 * C310 C-9 * R102 B-7 R327 C-2 C320 C-1 * Q302 C-8 R331 C-2 * C311 D-9 * R103 B-7 R328 C-3 C321 C-1 Q303 D-2 R332 C-2 C312 D-2 * R104 B-7 R329 D-2 C322 C-2 Q401 C-3 R333 A-4 C313 C-2 R105 C-4 R330 D-3 * C323 D-9 Q402 C-4 R334 A-3 C314 C-3 R106 C-4 R331 C-2 * C324 C-8 R335 B-2 C315 D-2 R107 C-4 R332 C-2 C325 D-2 * R201 B-8 R336 B-2 C316 D-2 R108 C-4 R335 B-2 C401 D-4 R202 B-4 * R337 C-8 C317 C-2 * R201 A-8 R336 B-2 C402 C-2 * R203 B-8 R338 A-3 C318 D-3 R202 B-4 * R337 C-8 C403 C-3 * R204 B-9 * R401 B-7 C319 C-2 * R203 A-8 C404 C-3 * R205 B-9 * R402 B-7 C320 C-2 * R204 B-9 TH301 C-2 C405 C-4 * R206 B-8 R403 C-3 C321 C-2 * R205 B-8 * C407 B-7 * R207 B-8 R404 C-4 C322 C-2 * R206 B-8 * X201 B-9 C408 C-4 R208 B-3 R405 D-4 * C323 D-8 * R207 B-8 * X202 B-9 C409 C-4 R209 B-3 * R406 B-7 * C324 C-8 R209 B-3 C412 C-4 R210 A-2 R407 C-4 C325 D-2 R210 A-2 C413 C-3 R211 B-3 R409 C-3 R211 B-3 * R212 B-8 R413 C-4 CN203 B-2 * R212 B-8 CN203 B-2 * R213 B-7 CN301 D-1 * R213 B-7 CN301 D-1 * R214 B-8 TH301 C-2 * R214 B-8 CN302 A-3 * R215 B-7 D101 C-4 * R215 B-7 CN303 A-4 * R216 B-7 * X201 B-9 D201 A-2 * R216 B-7 * R217 B-7 * X202 B-9 D301 C-2 * R217 B-7 D201 A-2 * R218 B-7 D302 C-1 * R218 B-7 D301 D-1 * R219 C-8 D302 C-1 * R220 B-9 D401 C-4 R221 B-3 R222 B-3 * FB201 B-7 R223 B-3 * FB202 A-7 R224 B-3

PARTS LOCATION

CD-333, CD-334 4-78,

MVC-CD200/CD300

no mark : side A * mark : side B

FS-83 BOARD JK-208 BOARD PK-58 BOARD

* C001 A-5 * BT101 C-7 C201 E-3 IC302 E-2 R401 C-1 * C002 A-5 C202 E-5 IC401 C-2 * R402 B-11 * C003 D-5 C101 C-2 C203 E-5 IC402 C-3 R403 D-3 * C004 B-5 C102 B-1 C204 E-4 * R404 D-12 * C005 D-4 C103 B-1 C205 D-4 L201 E-4 * R405 D-12 * C104 C-6 C206 E-4 L202 E-5 R406 D-2 * CN001 C-5 * C105 B-7 C207 E-3 L203 D-5 R408 C-2 * CN002 A-5 C106 C-3 C208 E-3 L301 F-1 R409 C-2 * CN003 A-4 C108 C-2 C209 E-4 L302 D-3 R410 D-2 * CN004 D-4 C210 E-3 L401 C-1 R411 C-3 CN101 C-2 C211 E-5 L402 E-1 R412 C-2 * D001 D-5 * CN102 B-5 C212 E-5 L403 E-1 R414 C-2 D002 D-1 C213 C-4 L404 C-1 R415 C-2 D003 A-2 * D101 C-6 C214 D-5 L405 C-2 R416 C-3 D004 D-3 * D102 C-6 C215 C-4 R417 C-3 * D005 D-5 * D103 C-6 C216 C-5 Q201 E-3 R418 C-2 * D008 B-5 * D104 C-6 * C301 F-12 Q202 E-3 * R419 D-12 * D009 C-4 * D105 B-7 C302 E-2 Q203 D-4 * R420 D-12 * D106 C-6 C303 E-2 Q204 E-4 R421 D-2 * F001 C-4 * D107 C-6 C304 D-2 Q205 C-5 R422 D-2 * F002 D-4 * D108 B-6 C305 F-1 Q206 E-4 R424 C-1 * F003 D-4 * D109 C-6 C306 F-1 Q207 C-4 R425 C-3 * F004 D-4 * D110 B-6 C307 E-3 Q208 C-5 R426 B-3 * F005 D-4 D111 C-3 C308 E-2 Q209 D-5 R427 C-1 * F006 D-4 * D112 B-7 C309 E-3 Q210 C-4 R428 D-3 * D113 B-6 C310 E-2 Q301 F-3 R429 C-3 FB001 A-2 * D114 C-5 C311 E-3 Q401 C-3 * R430 C-11 FB002 A-1 C312 D-3 Q402 C-3 R431 C-1 * FB003 D-5 FB101 C-2 C313 D-3 Q403 C-3 R432 C-3 * FB102 C-5 C314 D-2 Q404 C-3 R433 B-3 * LF001 A-5 * FB103 C-5 C315 D-2 R434 C-2 * FB104 C-5 C316 D-2 R203 E-4 R435 B-3 * Q001 B-5 * FB105 C-5 C401 D-2 R204 E-4 R436 B-3 * Q002 B-4 FB106 C-3 C402 C-3 R205 E-3 R437 B-3 * Q003 C-4 FB107 B-2 C403 D-2 R206 E-4 R438 C-2 * Q004 C-4 FB108 B-1 C404 D-2 R207 E-4 R439 B-3 * FB109 B-7 C405 C-3 R208 E-4 R440 D-3 R001 A-2 FB110 C-2 C406 C-2 R209 E-3 R441 D-3 R003 A-2 FB111 C-2 C407 C-3 R210 D-3 R442 D-3 R004 A-1 FB112 C-2 C408 C-3 R211 C-4 R443 C-2 R005 D-3 C409 C-3 R212 C-5 R444 B-3 R007 B-1 IC101 C-1 C411 C-3 R213 C-5 R445 C-2 * R008 B-5 * C412 D-12 R214 C-5 R446 C-2 R009 D-1 * J101 C-5 C413 C-3 R215 E-4 R447 C-2 * R010 B-5 * J102 A-6 C414 B-3 R216 C-5 R448 C-2 R011 B-1 C415 B-3 R217 D-6 R449 C-2 R012 D-1 LF101 C-2 C416 D-3 R218 D-5 R450 C-2 * R013 C-4 LF102 C-2 C417 D-2 R219 C-4 R451 C-2 * R014 C-4 C418 C-2 R220 C-4 R452 C-2 * R015 C-4 Q101 C-3 * C419 B-11 R221 C-4 R453 C-2 * R016 C-4 Q102 C-3 R222 C-4 R454 C-1 R017 D-2 Q103 C-2 CN201 B-5 R223 C-4 R455 C-1 CN301 D-1 * R303 D-12 * R456 C-12 S001 C-1 * R103 C-6 * CN302 D-7 * R304 E-12 * R457 C-12 S002 B-1 * R104 C-6 CN401 B-2 * R306 E-10 * R458 C-11 R105 C-1 R307 F-3 * R459 C-11 R106 C-2 D201 D-4 * R308 E-11 * R460 B-11 R107 C-2 D202 C-4 * R309 E-10 * R461 C-11 R108 C-2 * D301 F-12 R310 E-2 * R462 C-11 * R109 C-6 * D302 A-11 * R311 E-10 * R463 C-11 R110 C-2 * D303 F-12 * R312 E-10 * R464 C-11 R111 B-1 * D304 F-9 * R313 E-10 * R465 C-11 R112 C-2 D401 C-3 R314 E-2 * R466 C-11 * R113 C-6 D402 D-3 R315 E-2 R467 D-6 * R114 C-6 * R316 E-10 * R115 C-6 FB301 E-1 * R317 E-10 * S301 A-9 FB302 D-1 * R318 E-10 * S303 F-12 * S101 A-7 FB303 D-1 * R319 E-10 * S304 F-11 * S102 C-5 FB304 E-1 R320 D-2 * S305 A-10 * S103 A-7 R321 E-2 * S306 F-10 IC201 E-4 R322 F-3 * S307 F-9 IC202 C-4 * R323 D-12 IC301 E-2 R324 F-3 T201 D-5

PARTS LOCATION

4-79E FS-83, JK-208, PK-58,

MVC-CD200/CD300 SECTION 5 ADJUSTMENTS

1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards When replacing main parts and boards, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table. Replaced parts Board Block replacement Mounted parts replacement replacement Adjustment Adjustment Section Initialization of B, D, Initialization of D page data z E, F, 7, 9 page data Initialization of B, E, F, 7, 9 page datazzVideo Video output level adj. zzzzHALL adj. *1zzzzzFlange back adj. zzzzzFNo. standard data InputzzzzzMechanical shutter adj. zzzzzLight value adj. zzzzzzzMixed color cancel adj. zzzzzzzCamera AWB standard data inputzzzzzzzAuto white balance adj. zzzzzzzColor reproduction adj. zzzzzzzCCD white defect compensationzzzzCCD black defect compensationzzzzStrobe adj. zzzzzzzLED illumination checkzzLCD initial data inputzzVCO adj. zzzzzDrange adj. zzzzzBright adj. zzzzzLCD Contrast adj. zzzzzColor adj. zzzzzV-COM level adj. zzzzzV-COM adj. zzzzzzWhite balance adj. zzzzzzzBattery end adj. z z System control Serial No. inputzzMechanism Mechanical adj. zzz*1: MVC-CD200 model only. *2: When replacing the Base unit, reset the data of page: D, address: EC to EF to “00”. (Refer to “Record of Use check” of “5-2. SERVICE MODE”.) Table. 5-1-1. 5-1 Lens device Prelamp LED Flash unit Base unit *2 LCD block LCD unit (LCD901) LCD block Back light unit (ND901) CD-333/334 board IC101/IC401 (CCD imager) CD-333/334 board IC202 (S/H, AGC, A/D) SY-67 board IC301 (CAMERA DSP) SY-67 board IC101 (EVR) SY-67 board IC201 (Video amp.) PK-58 board IC302 (RGB decoder) (LCD) PK-58 board IC301 (EVR) (LCD) PK-58 board IC401 (Timing generator) (LCD) CD-333/334 board (COMPLETE) SY-67 board (COMPLETE) PK-58 board (COMPLETE) MD-083 board (COMPLETE) SY-67 board IC505 EEPROM MD-083 board IC406 EEPROM Supporting RRRRRaaaaadddddaaaaarrrrrWWWWW, 5-1. ADJUSTMENT 1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT 1-1-1. List of Service Tools • Oscilloscope • Color monitor • Vectorscope • AC power adapter • Regulated power supply • Digital voltmeter • Frequency counter Ref. No. Name Parts Code Usage Auto white balance adjustment/check J-1 Filter for color temperature correction (C14) J-6080-058-A White balance adjustment/check J-2 Pattern box PTB-450 J-6082-200-A J-3 Color chart for pattern box J-6020-250-A J-4 Siemens star chart J-6080-875-A For checking the flange back Adjustment remote commander (RM-95 upgraded) J-5 J-6082-053-B Note1 J-6 Clear chart for pattern box J-6080-621-A For connecting the adjustment remote commander J-7 CPC-9 jig J-6082-393-C For adjusting the LCD block For extension between the SY-67 board (CN701) and J-8 Extension cable (50P, 0.5mm) J-6082-487-A MD-083 board (CN404) J-9 Alignment disk J-6082-512-A For Base unit inspection J-10 Personal computer with Windows98/ME installed For checking the recorded picture J-11 Mini pattern box J-6082-353-B For adjusting the flange back J-12 Camera table J-6082-384-A For adjusting the flange back For extension between the MD-083 board (CN002) and J-13 Extension cable (18P, 0.5mm) J-6082-374-A the base unit. Note1:If the micro processor IC in the adjustment remote commander is not the new micro processor (UPD7503G-C56-12), The pages cannot be switched. In this case, replace with the new micro processor (8- 759-148-35). J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5 J-6 J-7 J-8 J-9 J-10 J-11 J-12 J-13 Fig. 5-1-1. 5-2, 1-1-2. Preparations Note1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer to “2. DISASSEMBLY”. Pattern box Note2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block and boards need not be disassembled. 1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 5-1-5. 2) The lens block (CD-333/334 board) must be connected, because About 34cm (MVC-CD200) the timing generator (IC201) is provided on the CD-333/334 About 28cm (MVC-CD300) board of the lens block. 3) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the following connector or jack. • CN302 of PK-58 board via CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C) • LANC (ACC) jack 4) If “CLOCK SET” display appeared in the screen after the power is turned on, set the clock, or cancel the display. Front of the lens Note3: As disconnecting the SY-67 board CN709 means disconnecting the lithium 3V power supply (JK-208 board BT101), data such as date, time, user-set menus will be lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data. If the SY-67 board CN709 has been disconnected, the self-diagnosis data will be lost. Before disconnecting, note down the self-diagnosis data (data of page: 2, address: B3 to B5). (Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION” Fig. 5-1-2. and “5-2. Service Mode” for the self-diagnosis data.) Note4: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced STILL Mode)” 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. The above procedure will enable the power (STILL (Auto) mode) to be turned on with POWER switch (SY-67 board CN705) disconnected. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the CN302 “Forced Power ON Mode”. 1 Note5: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced PLAY Mode)” 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the PAUSE 18 button of the adjustment remote commander. Tapping The above procedure will enable the power (PLAY mode) to be screw turned on. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced (DIA1.7 × 5) Power ON Mode”. Note6: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced MOVIE Mode)” 1 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 18pins 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 03, and press the PAUSE 18 1 button of the adjustment remote commander. 18 The above procedure will enable the power (MOVIE mode) to be turned on. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power ON Mode”. CPC-9 jig CPC lid Note7: Exiting the “Forced Power ON Mode” (J-6082-393-C) 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. Fig. 5-1-3. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 1-1-3. Discharging of the flashlight power supply The capacitor which is used as power supply of flashlight is charged Harness retainer with 200V to 300V voltage. Discharge this voltage before starting Capactior Capactior cap adjustments in order to protect service engineers from electric shock during adjustment. Short jig Discharge procedure 1. Remove the power supply (AC power adaptor or battery). 2. Fabricate the discharging jig as shown in Fig. 5-1-4 locally by yourself. Connect the discharging jig to the positive (+) and negative (-) terminal of the flash voltage charge capacitor. Allow ten seconds to discharge the voltage. Fig. 5-1-4. 5-3, Adjustment remote commander

AUDIO

(Black) CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C) Color monitor Vector scope 1

VIDEO

(Yellow) Terminated 18 at 75Ω 18 pins Lid open/close detect switch (S101,S103) 12 pins LANC jack AV OUT Must be pressed when using the CD-R/RW jack drive unit. Must be connected when performing the LCD system adjustments.

USB

jack Extension cable JK-208 (J-6082-487-A) Must be connected when board using the flash unit. ACC (LANC) CN101 jack To dew sensor Flash unit CN709 FP-361 CN702 CN705 CN405 CN002 CN701 (Note) SY-67 MD-083 board CN404 board CN707 18 PK-58 CN712 To strobeCN704 plunger board CN708 CN302 To spindle Must be motor connected. FP-364 CN001 To door lock plunger CN713 DC IN jack Lens unit Must be connected when using the flash unit. CD-333/334 AC-power adaptor board (8.4Vdc) AC IN CN203 Must be connected when AC-L10, AC-VQ800 etc. using the CD-R/RW drive unit. Note: To open the MD-083 board, use the following extension cable between the CN002 and the spindle motor. J-6082-374-A (18P, 0.5mm)

Fig. 5-1-5.

5-4, 1-1-4. Precaution 1. Setting the Switch Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform adjustments. SETUP settings Switch settings DEMO MODE (SETUP2) ... OFF 1. Mode dial ... Auto ( ) VIDEO OUT (SETUP2) ... NTSC 2. ZOOM W ... WIDE end MENU settings 3. MACRO ( ) ... Off 1. WHITE BALANCE ... AUTO 4. FOCUS (PK-58 board) ... Manual (0.3m) 2. ISO ... AUTO 5. EV (PK-58 board) ... 0EV 3. IMAGE SIZE ... 2048 × 1536 (MVC-CD300) 6. AE LOCK (PK-58 board) ... Off ... 1600 × 1200 (MVC-CD200) 4. PICTURE EFFECT ...OFF 2. Order of Adjustments Basically carry out adjustments in the order given. Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame ) Electronic beam scanning frame

H

C C=D D CRT picture frame

V

A B A=BBAFig. a Enlargement Effective picture frame Video terminal output waveform Fig. b (monitor TV picture) Difference in level Adjust the camera zoom and direction to obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. aBAand the TV monitor display shown in Fig. b. Fig. 5-1-6. 3. Subjects 1) Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust the picture frame as shown in Fig. 5-1-6. (Standard picture frame) White 2) Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) 841mm Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a Black clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations during this time.) 3) Flange back adjustment chart Make the chart shown in Fig. 5-1-7 using A0 size (1189mm × 1189mm 841mm) black and white vellum paper. Fig. 5-1-7. Note: Use matte vellum paper bigger than A0, and make sure the edges of the black and white paper joined together are not rough. 5-5 Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red Blue Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red Blue, 1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, D, E, F, 7, 9 PAGE 3. D Page Table DATA Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the D Page 1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF D PAGE DATA Data”.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of D Page Data”.) 1. Initializing the D Page Data Note: If the D page data has been initialized, the following Address Remark adjustments need to be performed again. Initial value 1) Modification of D page data 00 to 0F 2) LCD system adjustments 3) Color viewfinder system adjustments 10 00 Test mode 4) Battery end adjustments 11 to 4D Fixed data-1 4F Fixed data-2 Adjusting page D 50 to 8F Fixed data-1 Adjusting Address 10 to EF 90 86 Battery end adj. 91 8E Initializing Method: 92 9D Order Page Address Data Procedure 93 B21001 01 Set the data. 94 BD2403 Set the following data. 95 to B5 Fixed data-1 12: MVC-CD200 B6 1D Battery end adj. 11: MVC-CD300 B7 093400 2D Set the data. B8 to C5 Fixed data-14401 2D Set the data, and press PAUSE C6 5A Video output level adj. button. C7 615402 Check that the data changes to C8 to CD Fixed data-1 “01”. CE BA Bright adj. (LCD) 6 2 00 29 Set the data. CF B8 Contrast adj. (LCD) 7 2 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE D0 AA Bright adj. (LCD) button. D1 66 Color adj. (LCD) 8 Perform “Modification of D Page D2 98 White balance adj. Data”. D3 7A 2. Modification of D Page Data D4 B8 Contrast adj. (LCD) If the D page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed D5 B0 D range adj. (LCD) data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input. D6 7C V-COM level adj. (LCD) D7 6F VCO adj. (NTSC) (LCD) Modifying Method: D8 74 V COM adj. (LCD) 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. D9 73 Fixed data 2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because DA to DB Fixed data-1 they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy DC B5 Fixed data the data built in the same model. DD 6F VCO adj. (PAL) (LCD) Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camera may DE 9A Bright adj. (LCD) not operate. 3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the DF B8 Contrast adj. (LCD) adjustment remote commander each time when setting new E0 to EB Fixed data-1 data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. EC 00 Recording counter 4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. ED 00 If not, change the data to the initial value. EE 00 Processing after Completing Modification of D Page data EF 00 Order Page Address Data Procedure Table. 5-1-2. 1 2 00 29 Set the data. 2 2 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 5-6, 1-2-2. Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data 3. F Page Table Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F, 1. Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data 7, 9 Page Data”.) Note1: If “Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data” is performed, Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, all data of the B page, E page, F page 7 page and 9 page 7, 9 Page Data”.) will be initialized. (It is impossible to initialize a single page.) Note2: If the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page data has been initialized, Address Initial value Remark “Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data” and following CD200CD300 adjustments need to be performed again. 10 to 13 Fixed data-1 1) Video system adjustments 14 12 33 Flange back adj. 2) Camera system adjustments 15 A8 48 Adjusting page F 16 18 DA 17 C5 DF Adjusting Address 10 to FF 18 12 13 Adjusting page 7 19 C9 C0 Adjusting Address 00 to FF 1A 00 00 Adjusting page 9 1B 00 00 Adjusting Address 00 to FF 1C 00 00 Adjusting page E 1D 00 00 Adjusting Address 00 to FF 1E 41 00 Adjusting page B 1F 00 00 Adjusting Address 00 to FF 20 20 20 21 20 20 Initializing Method: 22 20 BA Order Page Address Data Procedure 23 44 461001 01 Set the data. 24 0A 0A2603 Set the following data. 25 00 00 12: MVC-CD200 26 B2 85 Light value adj. 11: MVC-CD300 27 63 B03600 2D Set the data. 28 2E 944601 2D Set the data, and press PAUSE 29 00 00 F No. compensation button. 2A 00 005602 Check that the data changes to 2B 00 00 “01”. 2C 00 00 6 Perform “Modification of B, E, F, 2D 00 00 7, 9 Page Data”. 2E 69 HALL adj. (MVC-CD200) 2. Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data 2F 84 Fixed data-1 (MVC-CD300) If the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page data has been initialized, change the data of 30 to 33 Fixed data-1 the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual 34 15 HALL adj. (MVC-CD200) input. 35 78 Fixed data-1 (MVC-CD300) Modifying Method: 36 to 39 Fixed data-1 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set 3A 2F 2F AWB standard data input data: 01. 3B 37 37 2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because 3C 40 40 they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy 3D D0 D0 the data built in the same model. 3E Fixed data-1 Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camera may not operate. 3F 86 B5 Auto white balance adj. 3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the 40 41 43 adjustment remote commander each time when setting new 41 03 03 Color reproduction adj. data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. 42 E9 E9 4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. 43 63 63 If not, change the data to the initial value. 44 83 83 Processing after Completing Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page 45 D5 D5 data 46 FE FE Order Page Address Data Procedure 47 73 731200 29 Set the data. 48 45 452201 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE 49 to 4C Fixed data-1 button. 4D 28 28 Strobe adj. 4E 6E 6E 5-7, F page Address Initial value Remark Address Initial value Remark CD200CD300 CD200CD300 4F to 58 Fixed data-1 9A 00 Flange back adj.(MVC-CD300) 59 00 00 AWB standard data input 9B 00 Fixed data-1 (MVC-CD200) 5A 14 14 Mechanical shutter adj. 9C to 9F Fixed data-1 5B Fixed data-1 A0 00 00 Mixed color cancel adj. 5C 63 63 Color reproduction adj. A1 00 00 5D 83 83 A2 00 00 5E 03 03 A3 00 00 5F E9 E9 A4 to A8 Fixed data-1 60 to 63 Fixed data-1 A9 05 0F Auto white balance adj. 64 10 10 Strobe adj. AA 02 01 65 to 68 Fixed data-1 AB to D3 Fixed data-1 69 02 02 Strobe adj. D4 80 80 Mechanical shutter adj. 6A 79 79 D5 98 8A 6B F8 F8 D6 A0 8A 6C 09 10 Mechanical shutter adj. D7 A8 8A 6D E6 05 D8 B0 8A 6E 05 09 D9 to FF Fixed data-1 6F D5 B5 Table. 5-1-3. 70 04 07 71 9B C4 72 03 07 73 DC 48 74 03 06 75 50 CB 76 01 01 77 01 01 78 01 01 79 01 01 7A 00 01 7B 09 2C 7C 17 3A 7D 33 2E 7E 33 2D 7F 33 2D 80 00 00 Auto white balance adj. 81 to 86 Fixed data-1 87 FF FF Flange back adj. 88 00 Flange back adj.(MVC-CD300) 89 00 Fixed data-1 (MVC-CD200) 8A 00 00 Flange back adj. 8B 00 00 8C 00 Flange back adj.(MVC-CD300) 8D 00 Fixed data-1 (MVC-CD200) 8E 00 8F 00 90 00 91 00 92 00 93 00 94 00 95 00 96 00 97 00 98 00 99 00 5-8, 4. 7 Page Table Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F, Initial value 7, 9 Page Data”.) Address Remark Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, CD200CD300 7, 9 Page Data”.) 92 0F 0F CCD white defect compensation 93 FF FF Address Initial value Remark 94 0F 0F CD200CD300 95 FF FF 00 to 5F Fixed data-1 96 0F 0F 60 0F 0F CCD black defect compensation 97 FF FF 61 FF FF 98 0F 0F 62 0F 0F 99 FF FF 63 FF FF 9A 0F 0F 64 0F 0F 9B FF FF 65 FF FF 9C 0F 0F 66 0F 0F 9D FF FF 67 FF FF 9E 0F 0F 68 0F 0F 9F FF FF 69 FF FF A0 0F 0F 6A 0F 0F A1 FF FF 6B FF FF A2 0F 0F 6C 0F 0F A3 FF FF 6D FF FF A4 to FF Fixed data-1 6E 0F 0F Table. 5-1-4. 6F FF FF 70 0F 0F 71 FF FF 72 0F 0F 73 FF FF 74 0F 0F 75 FF FF 76 0F 0F 77 FF FF 78 0F 0F 79 FF FF 7A 0F 0F 7B FF FF 7C 0F 0F 7D FF FF 7E 0F 0F 7F FF FF 80 0F 0F 81 FF FF 82 0F 0F 83 FF FF 84 0F 0F 85 FF FF 86 0F 0F 87 FF FF 88 0F 0F CCD white defect compensation 89 FF FF 8A 0F 0F 8B FF FF 8C 0F 0F 8D FF FF 8E 0F 0F 8F FF FF 90 0F 0F 91 FF FF 5-9, 5. 9 Page Table 7. B Page Table Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F, Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”.) 7, 9 Page Data”.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”.) 7, 9 Page Data”.) Address Remark Address Initial value Remark 00 to FF Fixed data-1 CD200CD300 Table. 5-1-5. 00 to 31 Fixed data-1 32 00 00 Serial No. input 33 00 00 6. E Page Table 34 00 00 Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F, 35 00 00 7, 9 Page Data”.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 36 00 00 7, 9 Page Data”.) 37 00 00 38 to 3A Fixed data-1 Address Remark 3B Fixed data-2 00 to FF Fixed data-1 3C to 3D Fixed data-1 Table. 5-1-6. 3E Fixed data-2 3F to FF Fixed data-1 Table. 5-1-7. 5-10, 1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 1. Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-67 board) Adjust the sync level and burst level of the composite video signal output. Mode Still (Auto ( )) Subject Arbitrary Measurement Point Video terminal of AV OUT jack (75Ω terminated) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address C6, C7 Specified Value Sync level: A=286 ± 5mV (NTSC mode) A=300 ± 5mV (PAL mode) Burst level: A=286 ± 5mV (NTSC mode) A=300 ± 5mV (PAL mode) Note: If “CLOCK SET” display appeared in the screen after the power is turned on, set the clock, or cancel the display. SETUP setting: VIDEO OUT (SETUP 2) ... NTSC (NTSC mode) ... PAL (PAL mode) Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 01 Set the data. 2 4 F1 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 3 D C6 Change the data and set the sync level (A) to the specified value. 4 D C6 Press PAUSE button. 5 D C7 Change the data and set the burst level (A) to the specified value. 6 D C7 Press PAUSE button. 7 4 F1 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 8 0 01 00 Set the data.

B A H

Fig. 5-1-8. 5-11, 1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 1. HALL Adjustment (MVC-CD200) RadarW Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the For detecting the position of the lens iris, adjust the hall AMP gain specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” are and offset. satisfied. Mode Still (Auto ( )) Note: If “CLOCK SET” display appeared in the screen after the power is Subject Arbitrary turned on, set the clock, or cancel the display. Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note1) Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander Perform the following data setting before the camera system Adjustment Page F adjustments. 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. Adjustment Address 2E, 2F, 34, 35 2) Input the following data. Specified Value 12 to 16 during IRIS OPEN 77 to 7B during IRIS CLOSE Page Address Data B 75 00 Note1: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 1 : 00 : XX Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data. Display data After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data Note2: If the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. setting. 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. Adjusting method: 2) Input the following data. Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 01 Set the data. Page Address Data2694 14 Set the data. B 75 103695 79 Set the data. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 4 6 01 6D Set the data, and press PAUSE button. SET UP Setting during Camera System Adjustments5602 Check that the data changes to VIDEO OUT (SETUP2) ... NTSC (NTSC mode) “01”. (Note3) 6 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 2E, 2F, 34, 35. Checking method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1003 03 Set the data. 2 6 01 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 3 1 Check that the display data (Note1) satisfies the specified value 1. 4 6 01 03 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 5 1 Check that the display data (Note1) satisfies the specified value.2. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 2 6 94 00 Set the data. 3 6 95 00 Set the data. 4 0 03 00 Set the data. 5 0 01 00 Set the data. 5-12, 2. Flange Back Adjustment RadarW (Using Minipattern Box) The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during auto focusing/manual focusing. Mode Still (Auto ( )) Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter for the minipattern box (Note1) Measurement Point Display data of page: F, address: 87 Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 14 to 25, 87, 8A , 8B (MVC-CD200) 14 to 25, 87 to 9B (MVC-CD300) Specified value 00 Note1: Dark siemens star chart. Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. Preparations: Adjusting method: 1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following Order Page Address Data Procedure figure. Note: 1 0 01 01 Set the data.The attachment lenses are not used. 2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and2601 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE the front of the lens of the camcorder is less than 3cm. button. 3) Make the height of the minipattern box and the camcorder equal. 3 6 01 27 Set the data, and press PAUSE 4) Check that the output voltage of the regulated power supply is button. the specified voltage. 4 6 02 Check that the data changes to 5) Check that at both the zoom lens TELE end and WIDE end, “01”. (Note3) the center of the siemens star chart and center of the exposure screen coincide. 5 F 87 Check that the data is “00”. Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to the adjustment addresses. minipattern box, so adjust the power supply output voltage to the specified voltage written Processing after Completing Adjustments: on the sheet which is supplied with the minipattern box. Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE Below 3 cm button. Minipattern box2001 00 Set the data. 3 Perform “Flange Back Check”. Camera Camera table Regulated power supply Output voltage : Specified voltage ±0.01Vdc Output current : more than 3.5A Red (+) Black (–) Yellow (SENS +) White (SENS –) Need not connected Black (GND) Fig. 5-1-9. 5-13, 3. Flange Back Adjustment 3-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2) 3-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) (MVC-CD200) (Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart) Perform this adjustment after performing “Flange Back Adjustment The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out (1)”. automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during Mode Still (Auto ( )) auto focusing/manual focusing. Subject Subject more than 500m away Mode Still (Auto ( )) (Subjects with clear contrast such as Subject Flange back adjustment chart buildings, etc.) (2.0 m from the front of the protection Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor glass) (Luminance: 350 ± 50 lux) Measuring Instrument Measurement Point Display data of page: F, address: 87 Adjustment Page F Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander Adjustment Address 14 to 25, 87, 8A , 8B Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 14 to 25, 87, 8A , 8B (MVC-CD200) Note1: Make the lens horizontal and perform this adjustment. 14 to 25, 87 to 9B (MVC-CD300) Specified value 00 Preparations: 1) Set the zoom lens to the TELE end and expose a subject that is Note1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: more than 500m away (subject with clear contrast such as 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. building, etc.). (Nearby subjects less than 500m away should not be in the screen.) Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjusting method: 1 0 01 01 Set the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure2601 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE1001 01 Set the data. button. 2 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE3601 15 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. (Note2) button. Place a ND filter on the lens so that4602 Check that the data changes to the optimum image is obtained. “01”. (Note2) 3 6 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE5F87 Check that the data is “00”. button. 4 6 02 Check that the data changes to Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to the adjustment “01”. (Note2) addresses. Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to the adjustment Processing after Completing Adjustments: addresses. Order Page Address Data Procedure Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Order Page Address Data Procedure2001 00 Set the data. 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 3 Perform “Flange Back Adjustment (2)”. (MVC-CD200) 2 Perform “Flange Back Check”. Perform “Flange Back Check”. (MVC-CD300) 5-14, 4. Flange Back Check Mode Still (Auto ( )) Subject Siemens star (1.0 m from the front of the lens) (Luminance : approx. 300 lux) Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor Measuring Instrument Specified Value The lens is focused. SETUP setting: DIGITAL ZOOM ...OFF Checking method: 1) Place the Siemens star 1.0m from the front of the lens. 2) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end. 3) To open the IRIS, decrease the luminous intensity to the siemens star up to a point before noise appear on the image. 4) Turn on the auto focus. 5) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused. 6) Select page: 6, address: 2C, and set data: 01. 7) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end. 8) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused. Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1) Select page: 6, address: 2C, and set data: 00. 5-15, 5. Picture Frame Setting Mode Still (Auto ( )) Subject Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) [MVC-CD200] Approx. 34cm from the front of the lens [MVC-CD300] Approx. 28cm from the front of the lens Measurement Point Video output terminal Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor Specified Value A=B, C=D, E=F Switch setting: Check on an oscilloscope ZOOM ... WIDE end FOCUS ... Manual (0.3m) 1. Horizontal period A=B Setting method: C=D 1) Select page: 4, address: 06, and set data: 01. B C 2) Shoot the color bar chart with the zoom WIDE end. A 3) Adjust the direction and distance between the pattern box and D camera, and set the picture frame to the specified position. 4) Mark the position of the picture frame on the monitor display, and adjust the picture frame to this position in following adjustments using “Color reproduction adjustment frame”. 5) Select page: 4, address: 06, and set data: 00. Fig. 5-1-10. 2. Vertical period E E=F F

V

Fig. 5-1-11. Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode) Color bar chart picture frame Effective picture frame Fig. 5-1-12. 5-16, 6. F No. Standard Data Input RadarW 7. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment RadarW Compensate the unevenness of the iris meter sensitivity. Adjust the period which the mechanical shutter is closed, and Mode Still (Auto ( )) compensate the exposure. Subject Clear chart Mode Still (Auto ( )) (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Subject Clear chart Adjustment Page F (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Adjustment Address 29 to 2D Measurement Point Display data of page: 6, address: AB Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data Adjustment Page F Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: Adjustment Address 5A, 6C to 7F, D4 to D8 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. Specified value 00 Switch setting: Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data ZOOM ... WIDE end Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. FOCUS ... Manual (0.3m) Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. Adjusting method: Switch setting: Order Page Address Data Procedure ZOOM ... WIDE end1001 01 Set the data. FOCUS ... Manual (0.3m) 2 6 01 BB Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Adjusting method: 3 6 02 Check that the data changes to Order Page Address Data Procedure “01”. (Note2) 1 0 01 01 Set the data. Note3: 2 6 01 AD Set the data, and press PAUSEThe adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 29 to 2D. button. 3 6 02 Check that the data changes to Processing after Completing Adjustments: “01”. (Note2) Order Page Address Data Procedure46AB Check that the data is “00”. 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 5A, 6C to 7F, D4 to D8. 2 6 6C 00 Set the data. 3 0 01 00 Set the data. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 2 0 01 00 Set the data. 5-17, 8. Light Value Adjustment RadarW 9. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment RadarW Adjust the standard LV value. Perform the mixed color cancel adjustment using the each data of Mode Still (Auto ( )) the color bars. Subject Clear chart Mode Still (Auto ( )) (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Subject Color bar chart Measurement Point Display data of page: 1 (Note3) (Color bar standard picture frame) Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander Adjustment Page F Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address A0 to A3 Adjustment Address 26 to 28 Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data Specified value 0FE0 to 1020 (MVC-CD200) Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. 0FC0 to 1040 (MVC-CD300) Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data Note3: This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode. Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: Switch setting: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. ZOOM ... WIDE end Note3: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. FOCUS ... Manual (0.3m) 1 : XX : XX LV data Adjusting method: Switch setting: Order Page Address Data Procedure ZOOM ... WIDE end 1 Check that the picture frame is set FOCUS ... Manual (0.3m) to the specified position. (Refer to “5. Picture Frame Setting”.) Adjusting method: 2 0 01 01 Set the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure3601 D7 Set the data, and press PAUSE1001 01 Set the data. button. 2 6 01 0D Set the data, and press PAUSE4601 D5 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. button. 3 6 02 Check that the data changes to5602 Check that the data changes to “01”. (Note4) “01”. (Note2) 4 0 03 06 Set the data. Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 5 1 Check that the display data (Note3) A0 to A3. satisfies the specified value. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 26 to 28. Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE Processing after Completing Adjustments: button. Order Page Address Data Procedure2001 00 Set the data. 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 2 0 03 00 Set the data. 3 0 01 00 Set the data. 5-18, 10. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input RadarW Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data Adjust the white balance standard data at 3200K. Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. Note2: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only once. Mode Still (Auto ( )) Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn off Subject Clear chart the power and turn on again. (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Note4: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 1 : XX : XX Adjustment Page F Display data Adjustment Address 3A to 3D, 59 Switch setting: Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data ZOOM ... WIDE end Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. FOCUS ... Manual (0.3m) Note2: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only once. Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn off Adjusting method: the power and turn on again. Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Place the C14 filter for color Switch setting: temperature correction on the lens. ZOOM ... WIDE end2001 01 Set the data. FOCUS ... Manual (0.3m) 3 F 49 Write down the data. Adjusting method: 4 F 49 Set the following data, and press Order Page Address Data Procedure PAUSE button. 28 (MVC-CD200), 27 (MVC-CD300) 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 5 F 4A Write down the data. 2 6 01 11 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 6 F 4A Set the following data, and press PAUSE button. 3 6 01 0B Set the data, and press PAUSE 08 (MVC-CD200), 80 (MVC-CD300) button. 7 F 4B Write down the data. 4 6 02 Check that the data changes to “01”. (Note4) 8 F 4B Set the following data, and press PAUSE button. Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 60 (MVC-CD200), 61 (MVC-CD300) 3A to 3D, 59. 9 F 4C Write down the data. 10 F 4C Set the following data, and press Processing after Completing Adjustments PAUSE button. Order Page Address Data Procedure 13 (MVC-CD200), 00 (MVC-CD300) 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 11 6 01 A7 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. button. 12 6 01 A5 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 2 0 01 00 Set the data. 13 6 02 Check that the data changes to “01”. (Note5) 14 6 01 3F Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 11. Auto White Balance Adjustment RadarW 15 0 03 04 Set the data. Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data. 16 1 Check that the display data (Note4) If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will satisfies the R ratio specified value. be poor. 17 0 03 05 Set the data. Mode Still (Auto ( )) 18 1 Check that the display data (Note4) Subject Clear chart satisfies the B ratio specified value. (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Filter Filter C14 for color temperature Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: correction 3F, 40, 80, A9, AA. Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note4) Processing after Completing Adjustments: Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjustment PageF1601 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Adjustment Address 3F, 40, 80, A9, AA2003 00 Set the data. Specified Value MVC-CD200: 3 F 49 Set the data that is written down R ratio: 2768 to 28A8 at step 3, and press PAUSE button. B ratio: 5F73 to 60B3 MVC-CD300: 4 F 4A Set the data that is written down R ratio: 26E0 to 2820 at step 5, and press PAUSE button. B ratio: 6060 to 61A05F4B Set the data that is written down at step 7, and press PAUSE button. 6 F 4C Set the data that is written down at step 9, and press PAUSE button. 7 0 01 00 Set the data. 5-19, 12. Color Reproduction Adjustment RadarW 12-2. Color Reproduction Check Adjust the color Separation matrix coefficient so that proper color Mode Still (Auto ( )) reproduction is produced. Subject Color bar chart (Color bar standard picture frame) 12-1. Color Reproduction Adjustment Measurement Point Video output terminal Mode Still (Auto ( )) Measuring Instrument NTSC vectorscope Subject Color bar chart (Color bar standard picture frame) Specified Value Each center of all color luminance points should settle within each color Adjustment Page F reproduction frame. Adjustment Address 41 to 48, 5C to 5F Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. Note2: This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode. Note2: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only once. Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn off 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. the power and turn on again. Note4: This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode. Switch setting: ZOOM ... WIDE end Switch setting: FOCUS ... Manual (0.3m) ZOOM ... WIDE end FOCUS ... Manual (0.3m) Checking method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 01 Set the data. 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 B 75 Check that the data is “00”. (Note1) 2 B 75 Check that the data is “00”. (Note1) 3 4 06 01 Set the data. 3 6 12 80 Set the data, and wait for 1 sec. 4 6 10 01 Set the data. 4 6 12 00 Set the data, and wait for 2 sec. 5 E 52 Write down the data. 5 6 01 A9 Set the data, and press PAUSE6E52 09 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. button. 6 6 02 Check that the data changes to7601 0F Set the data, and press PAUSE “01”. (Note5) button. 8 6 12 80 Set the data, and wait for 1 sec. Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 9 6 12 00 Set the data, and wait for 2 sec. 41 to 48, 5C to 5F. 10 Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of Processing after Completing Adjustments: the vectorscope so that the burst luminance point is set at the Order Page Address Data Procedure specified position. 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 11 Check that each center of all color button. luminance points is set in each2001 00 Set the data. color reproduction frame. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 2 6 10 00 Set the data. 3 4 06 00 Set the data. 4 E 52 Set the data that is written down at step 5, and press PAUSE button. 5 0 01 00 Set the data. Burst position Fig. 5-1-13. 5-20, 13. White Balance Check Processing after Completing Adjustments: Mode Still (Auto ( )) Order Page Address Data Procedure Subject Clear chart1601 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE (Color reproduction adjustment frame) button. Filter Filter C14 for color temperature2406 00 Set the data. correction3E52 Set the data that is written down Measurement Point Display data of Video output at step4, and press PAUSE button. page 1 (Note2) terminal4001 00 Set the data. Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote Vectorscope commander Specified Value 3E00 to 4200 Fig. 5-1-14. Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. Note2: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 1 : XX : XX Display data Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: R-Y 4mm 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. Switch setting: B-Y ZOOM ... WIDE end FOCUS ... Manual (0.3m) 4mm Checking method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Fig. 5-1-14 (A). 1 Check that the lens is not covered MVC-CD200 with any filter. R-Y 1.0mm2001 01 Set the data. 3 4 06 01 Set the data. 4 E 52 Write down the data. B-Y5E52 0E Set the data, and press PAUSE 6mm 1.5mm button. INDOOR white balance check6601 0F Set the data, and press PAUSE 6mm button. 7 0 03 04 Set the data. MVC-CD30081Check that the display data (Note2) R-Y0.5mm satisfies the specified value. 9 0 03 05 Set the data. B-Y 3mm 10 1 Check that the display data (Note2) satisfies the specified value. 6mm 11 Check that the center of the white luminance point is within the circle shown Fig. 5-1-14. (A). 6mm OUTDOOR white balance check Fig. 5-1-14 (B). 12 Place the C14 filter for color temperature correction on the lens. 13 6 01 3F Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 14 Check that the center of the white luminance point is within the circle shown Fig. 5-1-14. (B). 5-21, 14. CCD White Defect Compensation and Check RadarW 15. CCD Black Defect Compensation and Check RadarW Mode Still (Auto ( )) Mode Still (Auto ( )) Subject Arbitrary Subject Clear chart (Color bar standard picture Measurement Point Display data of page 6, address: 55 frame) (Note2) Adjustment Page 7 Measurement Point Display data of page 6, address: 55 Adjustment Address 88 to A3 Adjustment Page 7 Specified Value1 00 to 7F Adjustment Address 60 to 87 Specified Value2 00 Specified Value1 00 to 0A Specified Value2 00 Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data Note2: Turn on the camera power supply, wait for several minutes, then Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. perform this adjustment. Note2: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and no reflection on the clear chart. Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: Note3: Any subject other than the clear chart should not be in the screen. 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. Note4: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. Adjusting method: Switch setting: Order Page Address Data Procedure ZOOM ... WIDE end1001 01 Set the data. FOCUS ... Manual (0.3m) 2 F DE Write down the data. Adjusting method: 3 F DE 1E Set the data, and press PAUSE Order Page Address Data Procedure button. 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 4 F E3 Write down the data. 2 F DF Write down the data. 5 F E3 0E Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 3 F DF 4C Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 6 6 01 8B Set the data, and press PAUSE462C 01 Set the data. button. 5 6 90 00 Set the data. 7 6 02 Check that the data changes to6691 03 Set the data. “01”. (Note4) 7 6 92 00 Set the data. 8 6 55 Check that the display data8693 00 Set the data. satisfies the specified value1. 9 6 01 79 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 9 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 10 6 30 01 Set the data. button. 11 6 07 Check that the data changes to “01”. 10 F DE 0F Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 12 Wait for 4 sec. 11 F E3 60 Set the data, and press PAUSE 13 6 01 8D Set the data, and press PAUSE button. button. 14 6 02 Check that the data changes to 12 6 01 87 Set the data, and press PAUSE “01”. (Note5) button. 15 6 55 Check that the display data 13 6 02 Check that the data changes to satisfies the specified value1. “01”. (Note4) 16 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 14 6 55 Check that the display data 17 F DF 5A Set the data, and press PAUSE button. satisfies the specified value2. 18 6 01 89 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 19 6 02 Check that the data changes to 88 to A3. “01”. (Note5) 20 6 55 Check that the display data Processing after Completing Adjustments: satisfies the specified value2. Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 60 to 87. button. 2 F DE Set the data that is written down Processing after Completing Adjustments: at step2, and press PAUSE button. Order Page Address Data Procedure3FE3 Set the data that is written down1601 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. at step4, and press PAUSE button. 2 6 2C 00 Set the data. 4 0 01 00 Set the data. 3 6 91 00 Set the data. 4 6 30 00 Set the data. 5 F DF Set the data that is written down at step2 of “Adjusting method”, and press PAUSE button. 6 0 01 00 Set the data. 5-22, 16. Strobe Adjustment RadarW Adjusting method: Adjust the light level and white balance when the strobe light flashes. Order Page Address Data Procedure Mode Still (Auto ( )) 1 0 01 01 Set the data. Subject Paper which reflection rate is 18% 2 2 04 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE (Note2) (1.0m from the front of the lens) button. Measurement Point Data of page F, address: 64 and 3 Check that the flash is popped up. Display data of page14690 00 Set the data. Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander5691 00 Set the data. Adjustment PageF6692 FF Set the data. Adjustment Address 4D, 4E, 64, 69 to 6B7693 FF Set the data. Specified Value1 60 to 94866C 01 Set the data. Specified Value2 FA to FF or 00 to 06962C 01 Set the data. Specified Value3 FA to FF or 00 to 06 10 6 01 79 Set the data, and press PAUSE Note1: button.This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. 11 6 07 Check that the data changes to “01”. Note2: Background paper (J-250-130-A). Perform this adjustment in the 12 6 01 67 Set the data, and press PAUSE dark room or use a dark box. button. Note3: Any light other than the strobe light should not light up the plate. Note4: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: 13 6 02 Check the flashing, and check 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. that the data changes to “01”. Note5: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 14 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 1 : XX : XX button. Lower data Upper data 15 6 01 67 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 16 6 02 Check the flashing, and check that the data changes to “01”. 17 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 18 6 01 B9 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 19 6 02 Check the flashing, and check that the data changes to “01”. (Note6) 20 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 21 6 01 67 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 22 6 02 Check that the data changes to “01”. (Note6) 23 F 64 Check that the display data satisfies the specified value1. 24 0 03 02 Set the data. 25 1 Check that the upper data of display data satisfies the specified value2. 26 1 Check that the lower data of display data satisfies the specified value3. 27 2 04 00 Set the data. Note6: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 4D, 4E, 64, 69 to 6B. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 2 6 2C 00 Set the data. 3 6 6C 00 Set the data. 4 6 92 00 Set the data. 5 6 93 00 Set the data. 6 0 01 00 Set the data. 7 0 03 00 Set the data. 5-23, 17. LED Illumination Check Check the LED illumination optical axis. Mode Still (Auto ( )) Subject Paper which reflection rate is 18% (Note) (1.0m from the front of the lens) Measurement Point LCD screen Video output terminal Measuring Instrument Monitor TV Specified Value3 Center of luminance point should settle within the frame. Note: Background paper (J-250-130-A). Perform this adjustment in the dark room or use a dark box. Preparations: 1) Take a copy of the LED optical illumination axis frame with a clear sheet. (Enlarge or reduce the frame in same size as the effective picture frame of the LCD screen or monitor TV screen.) 2) Attach the copied LED optical illumination axis frame (transparent) on the LCD screen or monitor TV screen. (The frame of the LED optical illumination axis frame and the effective picture frame of the LCD screen or monitor TV screen must be agree.) Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure MVC-CD200 1 Turn on the auto focus. 2 0 01 01 Set the data. 3 B 3D Write down the data. 4 B 3D 64 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 5 6 2C 01 Set the data. 6 6 90 00 Set the data. 7 6 91 04 Set the data. 8 6 92 Set the following data, and press PAUSE button. E0 (MVC-CD200), 00 (MVC-CD300) 9 6 93 Set the following data, and press PAUSE button. 26 (MVC-CD200), 50 (MVC-CD300) 10 6 01 79 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 11 6 07 Check that the data changes to “01”. MVC-CD300 12 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Fig. 5-1-15. 13 6 23 06 Set the data. 14 Check that center of the luminance point is set in the specified frame of the LED optical illumination axis frame. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 2 B 3D Set the data that is written down at step3, and press PAUSE button. 3 6 2C 00 Set the data. 4 6 91 00 Set the data. 5 6 92 00 Set the data. 6 6 93 00 Set the data. 7 0 01 00 Set the data. 5-24, 1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 1. LCD Initial Data Input (1) Mode Still (Auto ( )) Note1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven by a high voltage AC Subject Arbitrary power supply. Therefore, do not touch the back light holder to avoid electrical shock. Adjustment Page D Note2: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages Adjustment Address CE to D9, DC to DF caused by static electricity. Note3: If “CLOCK SET” display appeared in the screen after the power Note: Refer to “1. LCD type check” for the discrimination of the LCD is turned on, set the clock, or cancel the display. type. SETUP setting: Adjusting method: LCD BRIGHTNESS (SETUP2) ...NORMAL 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, and input the data in the following table. [Adjusting connector] Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are each time to set the data. concentrated in CN302 of PK-58 board. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. Connect the Measuring Instruments via the CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C). The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN302. Address Data Remark CE BA Bright adj. Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name CF B8 Contrast adj. 1 N. C. 10 HI UNREG D0 AA Bright adj. 2 N. C. 11 LANC IN D1 66 Color adj. 3 N. C. 12 LANC OUT D2 98 White balance adj. 4 REG GND 13 MAKER RECOG D3 7A White balance adj. 5 N. C. 14 MS CLK D4 B8 Contrast adj. 6 N. C. 15 MS BS D5 B0 D range adj. 7 HSY 16 MS DIO D6 7C V-COM level adj. 8 PANEL COM 17 N. C. D7 6F VCO adj. (NTSC) 9 VG 18 VDD D8 74 V COM adj. Table 5-1-8. D9 73 VCO adj. DC B5 Fixed data DD 6F Fixed data DE 9A Fixed data DF B8 Fixed data CN302 Tapping screw (DIA1.7 × 5) 18pins 18 1 CPC-9 jig CPC lid (J-6082-393-C) Fig. 5-1-16. 5-25, 2. LCD Initial Data Input (2) 3. VCO Adjustment (PK-58 board) Mode Still (Auto ( )) Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will be blurred. Subject Arbitrary Mode Still (Auto ( )) Adjustment Page B Subject Arbitrary Adjustment Address 3A to 3F Measurement Point Pin 7 of CN302 (HSY) Note: Refer to “1. LCD type check” for the discrimination of the LCD Measuring Instrument Frequency counter type. Adjustment Page D Adjusting method: Adjustment Address D7 (NTSC) 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. DD (PAL) 2) Select page: B, and input the data in the following table. Specified Value1f= 15734 ± 30Hz Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander Specified Value2f= 15745 ± 30Hz each time to set the data. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. Setup setting: Address Data Remark VIDEO OUT ... NTSC 3A 59 Fixed data (This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode, so don’t 3B FF Fixed data set the setup setting to “PAL”.) 3C 04 Fixed data Adjusting method: 3D 5B Fixed data Order Page Address Data Procedure 3E FF Fixed data1001 01 Set the data. 3F 02 Fixed data25F0 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 3 D D7 Change the data and set the VCO frequency (f) to the specified value 1. 4 D D7 Press PAUSE button. 5 D DD Change the data and set the VCO frequency (f) to the specified value 2. 6 D DD Press PAUSE button. 7 5 F0 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 8 0 01 00 Set the data. 5-26, 4. D Range Adjustment (PK-58 board) 5. Bright Adjustment (PK-58 board) Set the D range of the LCD driver to the specified value. If deviated, Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified the LCD screen will become blackish or saturated (whitish). value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated Mode Still (Auto ( )) (whitish). Subject Arbitrary Mode Still (Auto ( )) Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN302 (VG) Subject Arbitrary External trigger: Pin 8 of CN302 Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN302 (VG) (COM) External trigger: Pin 8 of CN302 Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope (COM) Adjustment Page D Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Address D5 Adjustment Page D Specified Value A = 3.62 ± 0.05V Adjustment Address D0 CE, DE Specified Value A = 1.81 ± 0.05V Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjusting method: 1 0 01 01 Set the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure24F1 03 Set the data. 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 3 D D5 Change the data and set the24F1 03 Set the data. voltage (A) between the reversed3410 01 Set the data. waveform pedestal and non- 4 D D0 Change the data and set the reversed waveform pedestal to the voltage (A) between the pedestal specified value. and GAMMA1 limiter level to the4DD5 Press PAUSE button. specified value. 5 4 F1 00 Set the data. 5 D D0 Press PAUSE button. 6 0 01 00 Set the data. 6 D D0 Read the data, and this data is named DD0. 7 Convert DD0 to decimal notation, Pedestal and obtain DD0’. (Note) 8 Calculate DCE’ and DDE’ using following equations (Decimal calculation) DCE’=DD0’–12 DDE’=DD0’+32A9Convert DCE’ and DDE’ to hexadecimal number, and obtain DCE and DDE. (Note) 10 D CE DCE Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 11 D DE DDE Set the data, and press PAUSE 2H button. Pedestal 12 4 10 00 Set the data. Fig. 5-1-17. 13 4 F1 00 Set the data. 14 0 01 00 Set the data. Note: Refer to “Table 5-4-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”. GAMMA 1 limiter level

A

2H Pedestal Fig. 5-1-18. 5-27, 6. Contrast Adjustment (PK-58 board) 7. Color Adjustment (PK-58 board) Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified Set the color saturation to the standard value. If deviated, the color value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated will be too dark or light. (whitish). Mode Still (Auto ( )) Mode Still (Auto ( )) Subject Arbitrary Subject Arbitrary Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN302 (VG) Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN302 (VG) External trigger: Pin 8 of CN302 External trigger: Pin 8 of CN302 (COM) (COM) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page D Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D1 Adjustment Address D4, CF, DF Specified Value A = 540 ± 50mV Specified Value A = 3.17 ± 0.07V Adjusting method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 01 Set the data. 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 4 F1 04 Set the data. 2 4 F1 03 Set the data. 3 D D1 Change the data and set the3DD4 Change the data and set the voltage (A) between the white voltage (A) between the pedestal 100% (Reference level) and green and 10 steps peak to the specified to the specified value. value. 4 D D1 Press PAUSE button. 4 D D4 Press PAUSE button. 5 4 F1 00 Set the data. 5 D D4 Read the data, and this data is6001 00 Set the data. named DD4. 6 D CF DD4 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. White 100 % 7 D DF DD4 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. A Green84F1 00 Set the data. 9 0 01 00 Set the data. 10 steps peak 2H A Fig. 5-1-20. 2H Pedestal Fig. 5-1-19. 5-28, 8. V-COM Level Adjustment (PK-58 board) 9. V-COM Adjustment (PK-58 board) Set the common electrode drive signal level of LCD to the specified Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the value. specified value. Mode Still (Auto ( )) If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and conspicuous vertical lines. Subject Arbitrary Mode Still (Auto ( )) Measurement Point Pin 8 of CN302 (COM) Subject Arbitrary Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Measurement Point Check on LCD display Adjustment Page D Measuring Instrument Adjustment Address D6 Adjustment Page D Specified Value A = 6.50 ± 0.05V Adjustment Address D8 Adjusting method: Specified Value The brightness difference between the Order Page Address Data Procedure section A and section B is minimum. 1 0 01 01 Set the data. Note1: Perform “Bright Adjustment” and “Contrast Adjustment” before24F1 03 Set the data. this adjustment. 3 D D6 Change the data and set the V-COM signal level (A) to the specified Adjusting method: value. Order Page Address Data Procedure4DD6 Press PAUSE button. 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 5 4 F1 00 Set the data. 2 4 F1 01 Set the data. 6 0 01 00 Set the data. 3 4 10 02 Set the data. 4 D D8 Change the data so that the brightness of the section A and that of the section B is equal. 5 D D8 Press PAUSE button. 6 4 10 00 Set the data.

A

7 4 F1 00 Set the data. 8 0 01 00 Set the data. 2HBAFig. 5-1-21. ABBAABFig. 5-1-22. 5-29, 10. White Balance Adjustment (PK-58 board) Correct the white balance. If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced. Mode Still (Auto ( )) Subject Arbitrary Measurement Point Check on LCD display Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D2, D3 Specified Value The LCD screen should not be colored. Note1: Use the AC power adaptor during this adjustment. Note2: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts. If necessary, adjust them. 1. LCD panel 2. Light induction plate 3. IC802 Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 01 Set the data. 2 4 F1 02 Set the data. 3 D D2 98 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 4 D D3 7A Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 5 D D3 Check that the LCD screen is not colored. If not colored, proceed to step 11. 6 D D2 Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored. 7 D D2 Press PAUSE button. 8 D D3 Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored. 9 D D3 Press PAUSE button. 10 If the LCD screen is colored, repeat steps 6 to 10. 11 4 F1 00 Set the data. 12 0 01 00 Set the data. 5-30, 1-6. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1. Battery End Adjustment (SY-67 board) 1 0 01 01 Set the data. Check the battery end voltage. 2 Decrease the output voltage of the Mode Still (Auto ( )) regulated power supply so that the Subject All black digital voltmeter display is 5.50 ± (Cover the lens with a black cap) 0.01Vdc. Measurement Point Display data of page: 2, address: 9A229A Read the data, and this data is Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander named Dref. Adjustment PageD3D90 Dref Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Adjustment Address 90 to 94, B6, B7 4 Convert Dref to decimal notation, and obtain Dref’. (Note2) Note1: Use the CPC-9 jig for connecting the adjustment remote 5 Calculate D91’, D92’, D93’, D94’, commander. DB6’, and DB7’ using following equations. (decimal calculation) Switch setting: D91’ = Dref’+ 5 FOCUS ... MANUAL D92’ = Dref’+ 23 D99’ = Dref’+ 44 Connection: D94’ = Dref’+ 55 1) Connect the regulated power supply and the digital voltmeter DB6’ = Dref’+ 43 to the battery terminal as shown in Fig. 5-1-23. DB7’ = Dref’+ 14 Preparations: 6 Convert D91’, D92’, D93’, D94’, 1) Adjust the output voltage of the regulated power supply so that DB6’, and DB7’ to hexadecimal the digital voltmeter display is 6.1 ± 0.1Vdc. number, and obtain D91, D92, D93, 2) Turn off the power supply. D94, DB6, and DB7. (Note2) 3) Turn on the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote7D91 D91 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. commander. 8 D 92 D92 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 4) Turn on the power supply. 9 D 93 D93 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 10 D 94 D94 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 11 D B6 DB6 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 12 D B7 DB7 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 13 0 01 00 Set the data. Note2: Refer to “Table 5-2-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”. Digital voltmeter PK-58 CPC-9 jig board (J-6082-393-C) CN302 1 18 pins Regulated power supply

LANC

jack Adjustment remote commander Use thick cables. Shorten as much as possible. Battery holder (Bellow 20cm) Connecting point Fig. 5-1-23. 5-31, 2. Serial No. Input Write the serial No. in the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory). Convert the serial No. on the name plate from decimal to ASCII code, and write in the EEPROM. Page B Address 32 to 37 Input method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Read the 6-digit serial No. on the name plate, and convert each digit to ASCII code, and obtain D32, D33, D34, D35, D36 and D37. (See below.) 6-digit serial No. Convert to ASCII code. (Refer to Table. 5-1-9.) D37 (Data of address: 37) D36 (Data of address: 36) D35 (Data of address: 35) D34 (Data of address: 34) D33 (Data of address: 33) D32 (Data of address: 32) Example: If the serial No. is 123456. D32 = 31 D33 = 32 D34 = 33 D35 = 34 D36 = 35 D37 = 36 2) Input D32, D33, D34, D35, D36 and D37 to each address of page: B. Note: After setting each data, be sure to press the PAUSE button. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. Digit0123456789ASCII Code 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Table. 5-1-9. 5-32, 5-2. SERVICE MODE 2-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER The adjustment remote commander is used for changing the calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The adjustment remote commander performs bi-directional communication with the unit using the remote commander signal line (LANC). The resultant data of this bi-directional communication is written in the non-volatile memory. 1. Using the Adjustment Remote Commander 2. Precautions Upon Using 1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the following the Adjustment Remote Commander connector or jack. Mishandling of the adjustment remote commander may erase the • CN302 of PK-58 board via CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C) correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended • LANC (ACC) jack that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjustments 2) Set the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to and new adjustment data after each adjustment. “HOLD” (SERVICE position). If it has been properly connected, the LCD on the adjustment remote commander will display as shown in Fig. 5-2-1. Page Data Address Fig. 5-2-1. 3) Operate the adjustment remote commander as follows. • Changing the page The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH+ button is pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH– button is pressed. There are altogether 16 pages, from 0 to F. Hexadecimal notation0123456789ABCDEFLCD Display0123456789AbcdEFDecimal notation conversion value0123456789101112131415 • Changing the address The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed, and decreases when the REW (m) button is pressed. There are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF. • Changing the data (Data setting) The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed, and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF. • Writing the adjustment data The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment data (B, D, E, F, 7 page) in the nonvolatile memory. (The new adjusting data will not be recorded in the nonvolatile memory if this step is not performed.) 4) After completing all adjustments, turn off the main power supply once. 5-33, 2-2. DATA PROCESS The calculation of the DDS display and the adjustment remote commander display data (hexadecimal notation) are required for obtaining the adjustment data of some adjustment items. In this case, after converting the hexadecimal notation to decimal notation, calculate and convert the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it as the adjustment data. Indicates the hexadecimal-decimal conversion table. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table 2 Lower digit of hexadecimal0123456789ABCDEFUpper digit (A) (b) (c) (d) (E) (F) of hexadecimal0012345678910 11 12 13 14 15 1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 4 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 5 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 A (A) 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 1751B(b) 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 C (c) 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 D (d) 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 E (E) 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 F (F) 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 Note: The characters shown in the parenthesis ( ) shown the display on the adjustment remote commander. (Example) If the DDS display or the adjustment remote commander shows BD (bd); Because the upper digit of the adjustment number is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the meeting point “189” of 1 and 2 in the above table is the corresponding decimal number. Table. 5-2-1. 5-34, 2-3. SERVICE MODE 2. Bit Value Discrimination Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the 1. Setting the Test Mode adjustment remote commander for following items. Use the table Page D Address 10 below to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0”. Display on the adjustment remote commander Data Function 00 Normal 01 Forced STILL mode power ON 02 Forced PLAY mode power ON 03 Forced MOVIE mode power ON Address • Before setting the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: Page bit3 to bit0 discrimination 01. • For page D, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory bit7 to bit4 discrimination by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be Display on the Bit values exited even when the main power is turned off. adjustment bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 • After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data remote or or or or of this address to “00”, and press the PAUSE button of the commander bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 adjustment remote commander. 00000Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 10001200103001140100501016011070111A8100091001A(A) 1010B(b) 1011C(c) 1100D(d) 1101BE(E) 1110F(F) 1111Example: If “8E” is displayed on the adjustment remote commander, the bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the A column, and the bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown in the B column. 5-35, 3. Switch check (1) Page 2 Address 80 Bit Function When bit value = 1 When bit value = 0 0 Power switch (XPOWER ON) Power switch off Power switch on (Control switch block (ZK-503)) 1 Mode dial (XPB ON) *1 Except PLAY PLAY ( ) (Control switch block (ZK-503)) 2 Lens cap switch *2 Off On (XLENS CAP OPEN)(TK-61 board S503) (Without Lens cap) (With Lens cap) 3 Shutter button (XSHTR ON) Off On (Control switch block (RK-503)) 4 Shutter button (XAE LOCK ON) Off On (Control switch block (RK-503)) 5 Lid open/close switch On Off (XLID OPEN SW)(JK-208 board S101,103) (Lid close) (Lid open) *1: Refer to “Switch check (2)” and “Switch check (5)”. *2: MVC-CD300 model only. Using method: 1) Select page: 2, address: 80. 2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switches can be discriminated. 4. Switch check (2) Page 2 Address 86 Bit Function When bit value = 1 When bit value = 0 6 Mode dial (XSETUP) *3 Except SETUP SETUP (Control switch block (ZK-503)) *3: Refer to “Switch check (1)” and “Switch check (5)”. Using method: 1) Select page: 2, address: 86. 2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the Mode dial position can be discriminated. 5. Switch check (3) Page 2 Address 84 Using method: 1) Select page: 2, address: 84. 2) By discriminating the lower digit of the data, the rotation of the control dial can be discriminated. Jog dial Lower digit of the data (Control switch block (ZK-503)) When rotated upward. ...→0→4→C→8→0→... When rotated downward. ...→0→8→C→4→0→... 5-36, 6. Switch check (4) Page 2 Address 90 to 93 Using method: 1) Select page: 2, address: 90 to 93. 2) By discriminating the display data, the pressed key can be discriminated. Data Address 00 to 14 15 to 46 47 to 70 71 to A5 A6 to DE DF to FF 90 Control button Control button MENU (KEY AD0) DOWN UP (S002) No key input (IC402 is) (S001)(FS-83 board)(S001)(FS-83 board) (FS-83 board) 91 Control button Control button Control button SET (KEY AD1) RIGHT LEFT (S001) No key input (IC402 id) (S001)(FS-83 board)(S001)(FS-83 board) (FS-83 board) 92 DISPLAY AE LOCK EV ( ) FOCUS SPOT METER (KEY AD2) (S301) (S303) (S306) (S307) ( ) No key input (IC402 if) (PK-58 board) (PK-58 board) (PK-58 board) (PK-58 board) (S304)(PK-58 board) 93 ZOOM W ZOOM T JOG SET (KEY AD3) (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch No key input (IC402 ig) block (ZK-503)) block (ZK-503)) block (ZK-503)) 7. Switch check (5) Page 2 Address 94 Using method: 1) Select page: 2, address: 94. 2) By discriminating the display data, the mode dial position can be discriminated. Data Address 00 to 14 15 to 3D 3E to 67 68 to 93 94 to D0 D1 to FF Mode dial AUTO ( ) or Mode dial Mode dial Mode dial Mode dial Mode dial 94 PLAY ( ) or AE-S AE-A AE-M SCN MOVIE ( ) (MODE DIAL) (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch SETUP (IC402 ih) block (ZK-503)) block (ZK-503)) block (ZK-503)) block (ZK-503)) block (ZK-503)) (Control switch block (ZK-503)) Note Note: Refer to “Switch check (1)” and “Switch check (2)”. 8. LED check Page 2 Address 04 Using method: 1) Select page: 2, address: 04, set data: 01 and press PAUSE button. 2) Check that all LED are lit. 3) Select page: 2, address: 04, set data: 00 and press PAUSE button. 5-37, 9. Self Diagnosis Log check Example: Page 2 Address B3 to B5 C : 32 : 01 Address : B5 Address Initial value Function Address : B4 Address : B3 (Note) B3 00 Last error occurrence code B4 00 Note: “C” → “01” B5 00 “E” → “03” Using method: 1) The self diagnosis log is displayed at page: 2, addresses: B3 to B5. Note1:When no error occurs in this unit, data “00” is written in addresses B3 to B5. When the last error occurs, the data corresponding to the error is written in the address (B3 to B5). Note2:These data will be erased when the coin lithium battery (JK-208 board BT101) is removed (reset). 10. Record of Use check Page D Address EC to EF Address Function Remarks EC Recording counter Not used. ED (Hexadecimal) EE 1000-digit and 100-digit EF 10-digit and 1-digit Using method: 1) The recording counter data is displayed at page: D, addresses: EE to EF. These data are named DEE and DEF respectively. 2) Convert DEE and DEF to decimal notation, and obtain DEE’ and DEF’. (Refer to Table 5-2-1. “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion table”.) 3) Calculate the recording counter (N) using following equation. (Decimal calculation) N = DEF’ + DEE’ × 256 Initializing method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: EC to EF, and write data: 00 to each address. Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time to set the data. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 5-38E,

MVC-CD200/CD300 SECTION 6 REPAIR PARTS LIST

6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS NOTE: • -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may • Abbreviation The components identified by mark 0 or have some differences from the original one. CND : Canadian model. dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they HK : Hong Kong model. Replace only with part number specified. are seldom required for routine service. Some AUS : Australian model. Les composants identifiés par une marque delay should be anticipated when ordering these CN : Chinese model. 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. items. KR : Korea model. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant • The mechanical parts with no reference number J : Japanese model. le numéro spécifié. in the exploded views are not supplied. 6-1-1. OVERALL SECTION Cabinet (rear) section, 2 (See page 6-5, 6-6) not9519supplied 108K17 F 14 J BT901 E 13 16 D 15 (Note) 18 B D11 (Note) not 7 supplied C

J

5 A 25F56E5CKH245I12MG2D Cabinet (front) section, -B 083 Lens cabinet section (See page 6-3), Lens section (See page 6-4) 3 20 SY G 21 22- (CD300) 6A 7 JK-20255558H23 24 (CD200)I 26 not supplied 1 : BT101(Lithium battery) JK-208 board on the mount position. (See page 4-60) Cabinet (front) section, Note: The charging capacitor is charged to the maximum of 300V. Lens cabinet section There is a danger of electric shock due to the high voltage when the capacitor is touched by bare hand. (See page 6-2), Discharge the voltage remained in the capacitor, referring to the Service Note (See page 5). Lens section (See page 6-4) Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks 1 X-3951-672-1 CAP ASSY, LENS (CD300) 13 3-068-461-01 BASE, STROBOSCOPE 1 X-3951-763-1 CAP ASSY, LENS (CD200) 14 3-067-950-01 LID, CPC (CD300) 2 3-968-729-71 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 14 3-067-950-11 LID, CPC (CD200) 3 3-067-469-11 SHOE, ACCESSORY 15 X-3951-647-1 CASE ASSY, STROBOSCOPE (CD300) 4 3-069-159-21 PROCESS, (M2) INTERIOR LOCK 15 X-3951-655-1 CASE ASSY, STROBOSCOPE (CD200) 5 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 016 1-476-676-11 FLASH UNIT 6 3-067-937-01 LID, BT (CD300) 17 3-067-949-01 COVER, STROBOSCOPE (CD300) 6 3-067-937-11 LID, BT (CD200) 17 3-067-949-11 COVER, STROBOSCOPE (CD200) 7 3-068-462-01 SPRING, ST-POP-UP 18 A-7010-815-A DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSY (SERVICE) 8 3-318-382-01 SCREW (1.7X3), TAPPING 19 3-068-474-01 SCREW (M2), SPECIAL (STEP) 9 3-969-380-01 SPRING, BATTERY 20 1-681-545-11 FP-361 FLEXIBLE BOARD 10 X-3951-639-1 HOLDER ASSY, BT (CD300) 21 3-068-475-01 NUT PLATE (SIDE) 10 X-3951-651-1 HOLDER ASSY, BT (CD200) 22 A-7074-836-A JK-208 BOARD, COMPLETE 11 3-068-464-01 LEVER, ST SENSOR 23 3-068-875-01 RETAINER, B2B 12 A-7074-898-A SY-67 (300) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) 24 1-681-548-21 FP-364 FLEXIBLE BOARD (CD300) 25 3-713-791-11 SCREW (M1.7X5), TAPPING, P2 12 A-7074-900-A SY-67 (200) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) 26 3-067-797-01 STRING (T), CAP (CD300) (CD200) BT901 1-694-815-11 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY

Exploded view and parts list of DDX- G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY are not

shown. Page 6-8 is not shown. 6-1, 6-1-2. CABINET (FRONT) SECTION, LENS CABINET SECTION (CD200) 61 63 Lens section (See page 6-4) MIC901 57 53 LED901 not 53 A supplied 55 66 56 65 53 51 53 B 58 A 51 54 not supplied

B

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks 51 3-968-729-71 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 61 3-068-488-01 CUSHION, MICROPHONE 52 X-3951-650-1 CABINET ASSY, LENS 62 3-062-299-01 SHEET, MICROPHONE 53 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 63 X-3951-646-1 HOLDER ASSY, MICROPHONE 54 3-060-274-01 SCREW, TRIPOD 64 1-681-549-11 FP-369 FLEXIBLE BOARD 55 X-3951-652-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY 65 A-7074-907-A TK-61 (200) BOARD, COMPLETE 56 3-989-735-61 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 66 1-681-550-11 FP-370 FLEXIBLE BOARD 57 1-476-674-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (RL-503) 67 3-068-494-01 CAP, LED 58 3-067-948-11 PLATE, SIDE ORNAMENTAL LED901 8-719-084-32 DIODE TLOH20TP 59 3-713-791-05 SCREW (B1.7) MIC901 1-542-457-11 MICROPHONE 60 3-068-402-01 SHEET METAL, RETAINER 6-2, 6-1-3. CABINET (FRONT) SECTION, LENS CABINET SECTION (CD300) 113 115 Lens section MIC901 (See page 6-4) 106 111 110 LED901 not 106 supplied 119 A 109 117 106 104 102 106

B

not 107 supplied not supplied 106 A 102 105

B

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks 101 3-068-411-01 RING, FILTER 112 3-068-402-01 SHEET METAL, RETAINER 102 3-968-729-71 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 113 3-068-488-01 CUSHION, MICROPHONE 103 3-060-271-01 SCREW (M1.7X7) 114 3-062-299-01 SHEET, MICROPHONE 104 X-3951-642-1 CABINET ASSY, LENS 115 X-3951-646-1 HOLDER ASSY, MICROPHONE 105 3-060-274-01 SCREW, TRIPOD 116 1-681-549-11 FP-369 FLEXIBLE BOARD 106 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 117 A-7074-837-A TK-61 BOARD, COMPLETE 107 3-067-948-01 PLATE, SIDE ORNAMENTAL 118 1-681-550-11 FP-370 FLEXIBLE BOARD 108 X-3951-641-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY 119 3-068-494-01 CAP, LED 109 3-989-735-61 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 LED901 8-719-084-32 DIODE TLOH20TP 110 1-476-674-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (RL-503) MIC901 1-542-457-11 MICROPHONE 111 3-713-791-05 SCREW (B1.7) 6-3, 6-1-4. LENS SECTION (CD300) (CD200) not supplied M002 163 M001 164 161 165 not 162 supplied IC401 166 154 167 155 34-3 156 CD 152 157 not supplied 151 notsupplied IC101 D- C 159 Be sure to read “Precautions Upon Replacing CCD Imager” on pages 4-15 (CD200) and 4-16 (CD300) when changing the CCD imager. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks 151 3-831-441-11 SPACER (CD200) 162 3-989-735-31 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 (CD300) 152 1-758-415-11 LENS, ZOOM (VCL-6103WA) (CD200) 163 1-758-437-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (CD300) 153 3-068-533-01 FRAME (M), LENS (CD200) 164 3-067-751-01 RUBBER (N), SEAL (CD300) 154 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION (CD200) 165 3-713-791-05 SCREW (B1.7) (CD300) 155 3-058-032-01 ADAPTOR (CL), CCD FITTING (CD200) 166 A-7074-840-A CD-334 BOARD, COMPLETE (CD300) 156 1-758-436-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (CD200) 167 3-318-203-11 SCREW (B1.7X6), TAPPING (CD300) 157 3-060-714-01 RUBBER (CL), SEAL (CD200) IC101 A-7031-236-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (CD200) 158 A-7074-843-A CD-333 BOARD, COMPLETE (CD200) IC401 A-7031-268-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (CD300) 159 3-947-268-11 TITE (2), +B TAPPING (P) (CD200) M001 3-709-573-01 MOTOR UNIT, FOCUS (CD200) 160 3-068-443-01 FRAME (H), LENS (CD300) M002 3-709-574-01 MOTOR UNIT, ZOOM (CD200) 161 A-7031-247-A LENS ASSY (CD300) 6-4, 6-1-5. CABINET (REAR) SECTION-1 Lid CD section (See page 6-7) 208 209

A

202 Cabinet (rear) section-2 205 B (See page 6-6)B 201 SP901 C 215 218 205 C FS 204-83 213 211 210 J901 214 212 205 A Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks 201 3-069-046-01 SCREW (Y) (DIA. 1.7X5.5) 211 1-961-144-11 HARNESS (FS-140) 202 3-070-017-01 STAY, PO SPRING 212 3-068-496-01 PIN (DIA. 3), PARALLEL 203 3-068-479-01 CAP, CAPACITOR 213 3-068-450-01 COVER (CD), FLEXIBLE 204 3-070-014-01 SPRING, PRE OPEN 214 3-068-497-01 COVER, PARALLEL PIN 205 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 215 3-068-453-01 RETAINER, SPEAKER 206 1-476-675-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (ZK-503) 216 1-961-141-11 HARNESS (FS-136) 207 3-068-454-01 SHEET METAL (R), STRAP 217 1-681-546-11 FP-362 FLEXIBLE BOARD 208 3-068-457-01 SHAFT, STRAP 218 A-7074-835-A FS-83 BOARD, COMPLETE 209 3-056-559-11 SCREW (M1.7), 0 PART-NO. P2 J901 1-794-045-11 CONNECTOR, DC-IN 210 1-657-785-11 FP-248 FLEXIBLE BOARD (DEW SENSOR) SP901 1-544-839-11 SPEAKER (1.6 CM) 6-5, 6-1-6. CABINET (REAR) SECTION-2 C 262 270 271 258 261 272BA257 273 277 B PL902 not 278 supplied not 256 supplied

C

255 277 279 A 254 276 253 274256 252 275 PL901 280 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks 251 3-068-467-01 SPRING, CD OPENER 269 3-068-536-01 KNOB (M), MODE (CD200) 252 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION * 270 3-064-250-01 SPRING, F BUTTON 253 3-068-470-01 COVER, SOLENOID 271 3-067-942-01 BUTTON, FUNCTION (CD300) 254 3-068-469-01 SPRING, CD LOCK LEVER 271 3-067-942-11 BUTTON, FUNCTION (CD200) 255 3-068-468-01 LEVER, CD LOCK 272 3-068-424-01 COVER, DC 256 3-703-357-03 PIN, PARALLEL (DIA. 1.6X6) 273 X-3951-648-1 OPENER ASSY, CD (CD300) 257 1-961-142-11 HARNESS (FS-138) 273 X-3951-656-1 OPENER ASSY, CD (CD200) 258 3-068-481-01 COVER, ST LOCK 274 3-067-941-01 COVER, JK (CD300) 259 3-068-427-01 SPRING, CD LOCK 274 3-067-941-11 COVER, JK (CD200) 260 3-649-266-01 PIN, PARALLEL 275 1-961-143-11 HARNESS (FS-139) 261 3-068-428-01 SLIDER, CD LOCK 276 3-068-455-01 SHEET METAL (L), STRAP 262 3-068-423-01 SPRING, POWER 277 3-065-177-01 SCREW (1.7X3) 263 3-068-422-01 KNOB, POWER 278 3-068-421-01 RETAINER, MODE KNOB 264 3-068-493-01 RING, SLIDER 279 3-068-401-01 HEAD (M1.7),0 PART-NO. SPECIAL 265 3-068-625-01 SPRING, FRICTION 280 X-3951-643-1 CABINET (REAR) ASSY (CD300) 266 3-068-597-01 GRIP (M1.4), EG 280 X-3951-653-1 CABINET (REAR) ASSY (CD200) 267 3-068-623-01 PLATE, CLICK PL901 1-454-674-51 SOLENOID, PLUNGER (STOROBO PLUNGER) 268 3-068-619-01 BASE, DIAL PL902 1-454-988-11 SOLENOID, PLUNGER (DOOR LOCK PLUNGER) 269 3-068-420-01 KNOB, MODE (CD300) 6-6, 6-1-7. LID CD SECTION LCD901 not 305 supplied 307

B

301 303 301 A ND901

B

301 P 302 K-58

A

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks 301 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 307 X-3951-644-1 LID ASSY, CD (CD300) 302 3-068-459-01 LID, CD REAR 307 X-3951-654-1 LID ASSY, CD (CD200) 303 A-7074-838-A PK-58 (SH) BOARD, COMPLETE LCD901 1-803-858-22 INDICATOR MODULE LIQUID CRYSTAL 304 1-681-547-11 FP-363 FLEXIBLE BOARD (LQ25A3FR30) (SERVICE) 305 X-3951-645-1 STAY ASSY, UPPER 0ND901 1-517-787-71 TUBE, FLUORESCENT,COLD CATHODE 306 3-068-458-01 WINDOW, SOLAR Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une 6-7 specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.,

CD-333 CD-334

6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST NOTE: • Due to standardization, replacements in the • RESISTORS When indicating parts by reference number, parts list may be different from the parts All resistors are in ohms. please include the board name. specified in the diagrams or the components METAL: metal-film resistor The components identified by mark 0 or used on the set. METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. • -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may F: nonflammable Replace only with part number specified. have some difference from the original one. • SEMICONDUCTORS Les composants identifiés par une marque • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they In each case, u: µ, for example: 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. are seldom required for routine service. Some uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... , Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant delay should be anticipated when ordering these uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... , le numéro spécifié. items. uPD..., µPD... • CAPACITORS: • Abbreviation uF: µF CND : Canadian model. CN : Chinese model. • COILS HK : Hong Kong model. KR : Korea model. uH: µH AUS : Australian model. J : Japanese model. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks A-7074-840-A CD-334 BOARD, COMPLETE (CD300) C217 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V ****************************** C218 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V A-7074-843-A CD-333 BOARD, COMPLETE (CD200) C219 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V ****************************** C220 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V (Ref.No.;1000 Series) C221 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V (IC101 and IC401 are not included in this COMPLETE BOARD) C222 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V < CAPACITOR > C223 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C224 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C101 1-107-690-11 TANTAL. CHIP 6.8uF 20% 35V C225 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V (CD200) C226 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C102 1-125-827-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 25V (CD200) C227 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C103 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V C228 1-107-690-11 TANTAL. CHIP 6.8uF 20% 35V (CD200) C229 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C104 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C230 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V (CD200) C231 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V C105 1-104-329-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 50V (CD200) C302 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V (CD200) C106 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C303 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V (CD200) (CD200) C107 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C304 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V (CD200) (CD200) C108 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C305 1-162-967-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0033uF 10% 50V (CD200) (CD200) C109 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C306 1-164-677-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.033uF 10% 16V (CD200) (CD200) C111 1-164-850-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.50PF 16V (CD200) C307 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C308 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C201 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C309 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C202 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C310 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C203 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C311 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C204 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C205 1-164-876-11 CERAMIC CHIP 120PF 5% 16V C312 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V (CD300) (CD200) C313 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V C206 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V (CD200) C208 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C314 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V C209 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V (CD200) C210 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C316 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C211 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V (CD200) C317 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C212 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V (CD200) C213 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C214 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C318 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C215 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V (CD200) C216 1-164-876-11 CERAMIC CHIP 120PF 5% 16V C319 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V (CD300) (CD200) C320 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V (CD200) C321 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V (CD200) C322 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V 6-9,

CD-333 CD-334

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks C323 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB220 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH C401 1-107-690-11 TANTAL. CHIP 6.8uF 20.00% 35V FB221 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD300) FB222 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH C402 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V FB223 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD300) FB224 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH C403 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V (CD300) FB225 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 C404 1-104-329-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 50V FB226 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD300) FB301 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W (CD300) C405 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB302 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W (CD300) (CD300) C407 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V FB303 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W (CD300) (CD300) C408 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V (CD300) FB304 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W C409 1-164-850-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.50PF 16V (CD300) (CD300) FB305 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W C412 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V (CD300) (CD300) FB306 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W (CD300) C413 1-125-827-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 25V FB307 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W (CD300) (CD300) FB308 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W < CONNECTOR > (CD300) CN203 1-785-482-41 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 70P FB401 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD300) * CN301 1-784-178-11 CONNECTOR, FFC (ZIF) 26P (CD200) CN302 1-766-336-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P (CD300) < IC > CN303 1-573-356-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 16P (CD300) IC101 A-7031-236-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (CD200) < DIODE > IC201 8-752-397-43 IC CXD2470R-T4 (CD200) IC201 8-752-404-95 IC CXD2497R-T4 (CD300) D101 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (CD200) IC202 6-700-042-01 IC AD80044JSTRL D301 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (CD200) IC301 8-759-637-96 IC uPD16877MA-6A5-E2 D302 8-719-075-62 DIODE 1SS401(TE85L) (CD200) D401 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (CD300) IC302 8-759-637-96 IC uPD16877MA-6A5-E2 IC303 8-759-693-13 IC NJM12904V(TE2) (CD200) < FERRITE BEAD > IC304 8-759-681-42 IC NJM12902V(TE2) (CD200) IC401 A-7031-268-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (CD300) FB101 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH FB201 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W < COIL > (CD300) * FB201 1-500-282-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD200) L101 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH (CD200) FB202 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD300) L201 1-414-756-11 INDUCTOR 47uH (CD300) FB203 1-500-283-11 FERRITE 0uH L202 1-414-756-11 INDUCTOR 47uH L203 1-414-754-11 INDUCTOR 10uH (CD200) FB205 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W L203 1-414-756-11 INDUCTOR 47uH (CD300) (CD300) * FB205 1-500-282-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD200) L301 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH FB206 1-500-283-11 FERRITE 0uH L302 1-414-398-11 INDUCTOR 10uH FB208 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH L303 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH FB209 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH L304 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH (CD200) L401 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH (CD300) FB210 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH FB211 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH < TRANSISTOR > FB212 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH FB213 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH Q101 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO (CD200) FB214 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH Q102 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F13F14-T1(CD200) Q301 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO FB215 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD200) FB216 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH Q302 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO FB217 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH Q303 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO FB218 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD200) FB219 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH Q401 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO (CD300) Q402 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F13F14-T1(CD300) Be sure to read “Precautions Upon Replacing CCD Imager” on pages 4-15 (CD200) and 4-16 (CD300) when changing the CCD imager. 6-10,

CD-333 CD-334

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks < RESISTOR > R306 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W (CD200) R101 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R307 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W (CD200) (CD200) R102 1-218-931-11 RES-CHIP 15 5% 1/16W R308 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W (CD200) (CD200) R103 1-218-931-11 RES-CHIP 15 5% 1/16W R309 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W (CD200) (CD200) R104 1-218-939-11 RES-CHIP 68 5% 1/16W R310 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W (CD200) (CD300) R105 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W (CD200) R311 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W (CD200) R106 1-208-643-11 RES-CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R312 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W (CD200) (CD200) R107 1-218-981-11 RES-CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W R313 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W (CD200) (CD300) R108 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R314 1-218-947-11 RES-CHIP 330 5% 1/16W (CD200) (CD200) R201 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R315 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W (CD200) (CD200) R202 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R316 1-218-980-11 RES-CHIP 180K 5% 1/16W R203 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W (CD200) (CD300) R317 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W R203 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W (CD200) (CD200) R318 1-218-980-11 RES-CHIP 180K 5% 1/16W R206 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W (CD200) R207 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R319 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R211 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W (CD200) R320 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R212 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W (CD200) R214 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W R216 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD200) R321 1-218-954-11 RES-CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W R217 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD200) (CD200) R219 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R322 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W (CD200) R221 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W R323 1-218-980-11 RES-CHIP 180K 5% 1/16W R222 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W (CD200) R223 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W R324 1-208-712-11 METAL CHIP 16K 0.5% 1/16W R224 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W (CD200) R225 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W R325 1-208-683-11 METAL CHIP 1K 0.5% 1/16W (CD200) R226 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W R227 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W R326 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R228 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W (CD200) R229 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W R327 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R230 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W (CD200) R328 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R231 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W (CD200) R232 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W R329 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R233 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W (CD200) R234 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W R330 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R239 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W (CD200) R240 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R332 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R241 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R333 1-218-944-11 RES-CHIP 180 5% 1/16W R242 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD300) R244 1-208-635-11 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R334 1-218-944-11 RES-CHIP 180 5% 1/16W R246 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD300) (CD300) R335 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R247 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD200) R336 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R250 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R303 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R401 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD300) (CD200) R402 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD300) R304 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R403 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W (CD200) (CD300) R305 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R404 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W (CD300) R406 1-218-939-11 RES-CHIP 68 5% 1/16W (CD300) 6-11,

CD-333 CD-334 FS-83 JK-208

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks R407 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R009 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W (CD300) R010 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R409 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R011 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W (CD300) R012 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R413 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R013 1-216-150-91 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/8W (CD300) R014 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W < THERMISTOR > R015 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W R016 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W TH301 1-809-361-21 THERMISTOR (2125) R017 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W ************************************************************** < SWITCH > A-7074-835-A FS-83 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************* S001 1-786-039-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (Ref.No.;1000 Series) (FLASH/MACRO/SELF TIMER/EDIT SEARCH) S002 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (MENU) < CAPACITOR > ************************************************************** C004 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V A-7074-836-A JK-208 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** < CONNECTOR > (Ref.No.;2000 Series) CN001 1-691-349-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 11P BT101 1-756-191-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY) * CN002 1-580-056-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (SMD) 3P * CN003 1-580-056-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (SMD) 3P < CAPACITOR > CN004 1-785-283-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 14P C101 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V < DIODE > C104 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W C107 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V D002 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 C108 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V D003 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 D004 8-719-070-95 DIODE TLGU1008(T05,SOY) < CONNECTOR > D006 8-719-158-49 DIODE MA8120-TX D007 8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3 CN101 1-784-421-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 27P CN102 1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE(USB 5P) (USB) < FUSE > < DIODE > 0F001 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO 1.4A 32V (1608) 0F002 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO 1.4A 32V (1608) D102 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 0F003 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO 1.4A 32V (1608) D103 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 0F004 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO 1.4A 32V (1608) D104 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 0F005 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO 1.4A 32V (1608) D105 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 D106 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 0F006 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO 1.4A 32V (1608) D108 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 < FERRITE BEAD > D109 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 D110 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 FB001 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH D111 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 FB002 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH D112 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 < LINE FILTER > D113 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 D114 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 LF001 1-411-957-11 FILTER, COMMON MODE < FERRITE BEAD > < TRANSISTOR > FB101 1-414-233-22 FERRITE 0uH Q001 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR SSM3K03FE(TPL3) FB102 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH Q002 8-729-051-49 TRANSISTOR TPC8305(TE12L) FB103 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH Q003 8-729-804-41 TRANSISTOR 2SB1122-ST-TD FB104 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH Q004 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO FB105 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH < RESISTOR > FB106 1-469-324-21 FERRITE 0uH FB107 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH R004 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W FB108 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH R005 1-218-944-11 RES-CHIP 180 5% 1/16W FB109 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R006 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 FB110 1-469-084-21 FERRITE 1MH R007 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R008 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une 6-12 specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.,

JK-208 MD-083 SY-67

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks FB111 1-469-084-21 FERRITE 1MH A-7074-899-A MD-083 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) FB112 1-469-084-21 FERRITE 1MH ******************************* (Ref.No.;3000 Series) < IC > ************************************************************** IC101 8-759-657-69 IC PDIUSBP11APW,118 A-7074-898-A SY-67 (300) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) < JACK > (CD300) ************************************** J101 1-793-995-21 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE (ACC) A-7074-900-A SY-67 (200) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) J102 1-569-950-31 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (A/V OUT (MONO)) (CD200) ************************************** < LINE FILTER > (Ref.No.;5000 Series) LF101 1-419-100-21 INDUCTOR 0uH ************************************************************** LF102 1-419-100-21 INDUCTOR 0uH < TRANSISTOR > Electrical parts list of the MD-083 and SY- 67 boards are not shown. Q101 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO Q102 8-729-037-61 TRANSISTOR UN9113J-(K8).SO Pages from 6-14 to 6-24 are not shown. Q103 8-729-037-61 TRANSISTOR UN9113J-(K8).SO < RESISTOR > R103 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R104 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R105 1-220-168-11 RES-CHIP 24 5% 1/16W R106 1-220-168-11 RES-CHIP 24 5% 1/16W R107 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R108 1-218-983-11 RES-CHIP 330K 5% 1/16W R109 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R110 1-216-849-11 METAL CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W R111 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R112 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R113 1-218-935-11 RES-CHIP 33 5% 1/16W R114 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R115 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W < SWITCH > S101 1-762-805-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (OPEN/CLOSE) S103 1-762-805-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (OPEN/CLOSE) ************************************************************** 6-13,

PK-58

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks A-7074-838-A PK-58 (SH) BOARD, COMPLETE < DIODE > ************************** (Ref.No.;4000 Series) D202 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 D301 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 < CAPACITOR > D302 8-719-070-91 DIODE TLSU1008(T05,SOY) D303 8-719-016-74 DIODE 1SS352-TPH3 C201 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V D304 8-719-070-93 DIODE TLAU1008(T05,SOY) C202 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V C203 1-165-128-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 16V D401 8-719-084-47 DIODE 1SV290(TPL3) C204 1-135-149-21 TANTALUM CHIP 2.2uF 20% 10V D402 8-719-976-96 DIODE MA8047-H-TX C205 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V < FERRITE BEAD > C206 1-164-856-81 CERAMIC CHIP 18PF 5% 16V C207 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V FB301 1-414-234-22 FERRITE 0uH C208 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V FB302 1-414-234-22 FERRITE 0uH C209 1-164-860-11 CERAMIC CHIP 27PF 5% 16V FB303 1-414-234-22 FERRITE 0uH C211 1-113-682-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 10V < IC > C212 1-115-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10V C213 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V IC201 8-759-521-35 IC TL5001CDR C214 1-164-657-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 50V IC202 8-759-710-82 IC NJM2406F-TE2 C215 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V IC301 8-759-364-05 IC MB40D001PFV-G-BND-ER 0C216 1-131-959-91 CERAMIC CHIP 12PF 10% 3KV IC302 8-759-539-27 IC IR3Y37A4 IC401 8-759-587-61 IC LZ9GH234 C301 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C302 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V IC402 8-759-327-01 IC NJM062V(TE2) C303 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C304 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V < COIL > C305 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V L201 1-414-753-91 INDUCTOR 4.7uH C306 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V L202 1-424-674-11 INDUCTOR 22uH C307 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V L203 1-419-387-21 INDUCTOR 100uH C308 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V L301 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH C309 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V L302 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH C310 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V L401 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH C311 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V L402 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH C312 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V L403 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH C313 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V L405 1-412-949-21 INDUCTOR 6.8uH C314 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C315 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V < TRANSISTOR > C316 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V Q201 8-729-042-72 TRANSISTOR UN9214J-(K8).SO C402 1-113-986-11 TANTAL. CHIP 2.2uF 20% 25V Q202 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J-(K8).SO C403 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V Q203 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO C404 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V Q204 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO C405 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V Q205 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO C406 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V Q206 8-729-823-84 TRANSISTOR FP102-TL C407 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V Q207 8-729-053-52 TRANSISTOR HN1C01FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) C408 1-164-872-11 CERAMIC CHIP 82PF 5% 16V Q208 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO C409 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V Q209 8-729-039-43 TRANSISTOR FP216-TL C411 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF 5% 50V Q210 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J-(K8).SO C412 1-164-872-11 CERAMIC CHIP 82PF 5% 16V Q301 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO C413 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V Q401 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO C414 1-113-994-11 TANTAL. CHIP 6.8uF 20% 16V Q402 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO C415 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V Q403 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO C416 1-164-346-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 16V Q404 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO C417 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V < RESISTOR > C418 1-164-346-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 6V R203 1-208-703-11 METAL CHIP 6.8K 0.5% 1/16W < CONNECTOR > R204 1-218-970-11 METAL CHIP 27K 0.5% 1/16W R205 1-218-978-11 METAL CHIP 120K 0.5% 1/16W CN201 1-764-709-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 10P R206 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W CN301 1-770-742-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 32P R207 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W CN302 1-766-348-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 18P * CN401 1-774-261-11 CONNECTOR, FFC (ZIF) 24P Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une 6-25 specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.,

PK-58 TK-61

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks R208 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W R436 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W R209 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R437 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R210 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W R438 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W R211 1-208-689-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 0.5% 1/16W R440 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R212 1-208-695-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 0.5% 1/16W R442 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R213 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R444 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R214 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R445 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R215 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R446 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R216 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R447 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R217 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W R448 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R218 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W R449 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R219 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R455 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R220 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W R458 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R221 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R459 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R222 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R461 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R223 1-218-942-11 RES-CHIP 120 5% 1/16W R462 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R303 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W R463 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R304 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R467 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R306 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R307 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W < SWITCH > R308 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W S301 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (DISPLAY) R309 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W S303 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (AE LOCK) R310 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 S304 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (SPOT METER) R311 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W S305 1-692-088-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (RESET) R312 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W S306 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (EXPOSURE) R313 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W S307 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FOCUS) R316 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W R317 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W < TRANSFORMER > R318 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W R319 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W 0T201 1-435-227-11 TRANSFORMER, INVERTER ************************************************************** R320 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R321 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W A-7074-837-A TK-61 BOARD, COMPLETE (CD300) R322 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W ***************************** R323 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W A-7074-907-A TK-61 (200) BOARD, COMPLETE (CD200) R403 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 ********************************* (Ref.No.;6000 Series) R404 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R405 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W < CONNECTOR > R408 1-218-987-11 RES-CHIP 680K 5% 1/16W R409 1-218-978-11 RES-CHIP 120K 5% 1/16W CN501 1-766-335-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P R410 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W CN503 1-766-335-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P R411 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W < TRANSISTOR > R412 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R414 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W Q501 8-729-427-72 TRANSISTOR HN1C01FU-TE85R R415 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R416 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W < RESISTOR > R417 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W R502 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R418 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R503 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R419 1-208-931-11 METAL CHIP 68K 0.5% 1/16W R504 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R420 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R506 1-218-940-11 RES-CHIP 82 5% 1/16W R421 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R507 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R422 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R508 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R425 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R509 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R426 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R510 1-218-942-11 RES-CHIP 120 5% 1/16W R427 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R511 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R428 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R512 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R429 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R432 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R433 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R434 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par R435 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une 6-26 specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.,

TK-61

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks < SWITCH > 3-067-952-11 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD) (ENGLISH) (CD200:US,CND,AEP,UK,AUS,CN,E,JE,HK/ S502 1-771-331-81 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (LENS CAP DETECT) CD300:US,CND,AEP,UK,AUS,CN,E,JE,HK) (CD300) 3-067-952-21 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD) ************************************************************** (FRENCH/GERMAN) (CD200:CND,AEP,JE/CD300:CND,AEP,JE) ACCESSORIES 3-067-952-31 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD) *********** (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (CD200:AEP,E,JE/CD300:AEP,E,JE) 0 1-475-599-11 ADAPTOR, AC (L10A) 3-067-952-41 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD) (CD200:US,CND,AEP,UK,AUS,JE,HK,J,E/ (ITALIAN/DUTCH) (CD200:AEP/CD300:AEP) CD300:US,CND,AEP,UK,AUS,JE,HK,J,E) 3-067-952-51 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD) 0 1-475-599-71 ADAPTOR, AC (L10A) (CD200:KR/CD300:KR) (TRADITIONAL CHINESE/SIMPLIFIED CHINESE) 0 1-475-599-81 ADAPTOR, AC (L10B) (CD200:CN/CD300:CN) (CD200:CN,E,JE,HK/CD300:CN,E,JE,HK) 1-543-798-11 FILTER, CLAMP (FERRITE CORE) 0 1-569-007-11 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P 3-067-952-61 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD) (CD200:JE/CD300:JE) (SWEDISH) (CD200:AEP/CD300:AEP) 3-067-952-71 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD)(ARABIC) 0 1-569-008-21 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (CD200:E/CD300:E) (CD200:E,HK/CD300:E,HK) 3-067-952-81 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD)(KOREAN) 0 1-696-819-11 CORD, POWER (CD200:AUS/CD300:AUS) (CD200:JE,KR/CD300:JE,KR) 1-757-293-31 CORD, CONNECTION (USB 5P) 3-069-219-01 SPVD-006 (CD-ROM) (DIRECT CD) 0 1-769-608-11 CORD, POWER (CD200:AEP,E/CD300:AEP,E) 3-987-015-01 BELT (S), SHOULDER 0 1-776-985-11 CORD, POWER (CD200:KR/CD300:KR) X-3951-672-1 CAP ASSY, LENS (CD300) 0 1-782-476-11 CORD, POWER (CD200:CN/CD300:CN) X-3951-763-1 CAP ASSY, LENS (CD200) 0 1-783-374-11 CORD, POWER (CD200:UK,HK/CD300:UK,HK) NP-FM50 BATTERY PACK (NOT SUPPLIED) 1-783-738-31 CORD, CONNECTION (AV CABLE)(1.5m) 0 1-790-073-11 CORD, POWER 2P (CD200:JE,J/CD300:JE,J) 0 1-790-107-22 CORD, POWER (CD200:US,CND/CD300:US,CND) 3-062-875-01 INSTRUCTION (FOR SAFETY) (CD200:J/CD300:J) 3-063-085-01 ADAPTOR, D (8cm CD) 3-066-676-01 SPVD-004 (P)(CD-ROM)(USB DRIVER) (CD200:AEP,UK,AUS,CN,E,JE,HK,KR/ CD300:AEP,UK,AUS,CN,E,JE,HK,KR) 3-066-677-01 SPVD-004 (I)(CD-ROM)(USB DRIVER) (CD200:US,CND,J/CD300:US,CND,J) 3-067-797-01 STRING (T), CAP (CD300) 3-067-951-01 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE) (CD200:J/CD300:J) 3-067-951-11 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH) (CD200:US,CND,AEP,UK,AUS,CN,E,JE,HK/ CD300:US,CND,AEP,UK,AUS,CN,E,JE,HK) 3-067-951-21 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (FRENCH/GERMAN) (CD200:CND,AEP,JE/CD300:CND,AEP,JE) 3-067-951-31 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (CD200:AEP,E,JE/CD300:AEP,E,JE) 3-067-951-41 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/DUTCH) (CD200:AEP/CD300:AEP) 3-067-951-51 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONAL CHINESE/SIMPLIFIED CHINESE) (CD200:CN,E,JE,HK/CD300:CN,E,JE,HK) 3-067-951-61 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (SWEDISH) (CD200:AEP/CD300:AEP) 3-067-951-71 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (ARABIC) (CD200:E/CD300:E) 3-067-951-81 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (KOREAN) (CD200:JE,KR/CD300:JE,KR) 3-067-952-01 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD) (JAPANESE) (CD200:J/CD300:J) Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une 6-27E specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié., 〈LED ILLUMINATION AXIS FRAME〉

MVC-CD200 MVC-CD300

Take a copy of LED ILLUMINATION AXIS FRAME with a clear sheet for use. — 160 — ✂, 〈FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT〉 For NTSC mode Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION FRAME with a clear sheet for use. MVC-CD200/CD300 — 161 — ✂,

MVC-CD200/CD300

2001E1600-1 9-929-900-31 Sony EMCS Co. Kohda TEC ©2001.5 — 162 — Published by PV Customer Center,

Reverse 992990031.pdf Revision History

S.M. Rev. Ver. Date History Contents issued 1.0 2001.05 Official Release — —]
15

Similar documents

CAUTION WARNING This symbol is intended to alert You are cautioned that any changes or
MVC-CD500 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.0 2003. 04 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Australian Model Japanese Model Link SPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMENTAL PARTS • INSTRUCTION MANUAL is shown at the end of this document. DIGITAL STILL CAMERA MVC-CD500
MVC-FD81 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model AEP Model E Model Australian Model Hong Kong Model Tourist Model Chinese Model DIGITAL STILL CAMERA
MVC-FD81 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model AEP Model Ver 1.0 1998.09 UK Model E Model Australian Model Hong Kong Model Tourist Model Chinese Model SPECIFICATIONS DIGITAL STILL CAMERA MICROFILM CD-206 BOARD CAMERA REC 1 IC431 1,3 78µsec 9.5Vp-p 2 IC431 2,4 µ 9.5Vp-p78 sec 3 IC431 8 1.8Vp-p 78µse
S® Training Manual Digital Camera Sony Mavica Cameras MVC-FD85 Troubleshooting & Circuit Descriptions Course: DSC-01
S® Training Manual Digital Camera Sony Mavica Cameras Models: MVC-FD85 MVC-FD90 MVC-FD95 MVC-FD85 Troubleshooting & Circuit Descriptions Course: DSC-01 Table of Contents Introduction Floppy Disc Drive 41 Common Failures 1 Checking for Floppy Disc Drive Voltage 41 Purpose of this book 1 Checking the
MVC-FD71 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model AEP Model UK Model Ver 1.3 2000. 09 E Model With SUPPLEMENT-1 Australian Model (9-974-076-81) Hong Kong Model
MVC-FD71 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model AEP Model UK Model Ver 1.3 2000. 09 E Model With SUPPLEMENT-1 Australian Model (9-974-076-81) Hong Kong Model Tourist Model SPECIFICATIONS DIGITAL STILL CAMERA MICROFILM • Floppy disk that can be used by the MVC-FD71 • Size : 3.5-inch • Type : 2 HD • C
MVC-FD75 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model AEP Model UK Model Ver 1.0 2001. 01 E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Brazilian Model DIGITAL STILL CAMERA
MVC-FD75 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model AEP Model UK Model Ver 1.0 2001. 01 E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Brazilian Model SPECIFICATIONS DIGITAL STILL CAMERA • Floppy disk that can be used by the MVC-FD75 • Size : 3.5-inch • Type : 2 HD • Capacity : 1.44 MB • Format : MS-DOS forma
LCD screen Mass (Approx.) NP-F330 battery pack
MVC-FD87/FD92 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model Level 2 AEP Model UK Model E Model Ver 1.1 2001. 06 Hong Kong Model Australian Model Korea Model Japanese Model PHoto: MVC-FD92 This service manual contains information for Japanese model as well. When the machine needs to be repaired, please refe
AVR055: Using a 32kHz XTAL for run-time calibration of the internal RC
AVR055: Using a 32kHz XTAL for run-time calibration of the internal RC Features • Calibration using a 32 kHz external crystal • Adjustable RC frequency with maximum +/-2% accuracy • Tune RC oscillator at any operating voltage and temperature • Tune RC oscillator to any frequency within specification
8-bit RISC Microcontroller Application Note
8-bit RISC Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 1981A–AVR–03/05 AVR155: Accessing an I2C LCD Display using the AVR® 2-wire Serial Interface Features • Compatible with Philips' I2C protocol • 2-wire Serial Interface Master Driver for Easy Transmit and Receive Function • Initialization and Use ofa2x1
AVR107: Interfacing AVR serial memories
AVR107: Interfacing AVR serial memories Features • Devices: AT25128A/256A, AT25F1024/2048/4096 • Full Serial Memory Functions Support • Memory Array Burst Read • Page Burst Write • Write Protection Detection • On Going Access Detection • Non-blocking Write Access • Access Status Information 1 Introd
AVR120: Characterization and Calibration of the ADC on an AVR
AVR120: Characterization and Calibration of the ADC on an AVR Features • Understanding Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) characteristics • Measuring parameters describing ADC characteristics • Temperature, frequency and supply voltage dependencies • Compensating for offset and gain error Introductio
AVR001 Conditional Assembly and portability macros
AVR001 Conditional Assembly and portability macros Features • Increased portability • Easier Code Writing • Simplified I/O Register Access • Improved Assembly Status Feedback 1 Introduction This application note describes the Conditional Assembly feature present in the AVR Assembler version 1.74 and
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 2527A–AVR–9/02 AVR223: Digital Filters with AVR Features • Implementations of Simple Digital Filters • Coefficient and Data Scaling • Fast Implementation of 2nd Order FIR Filter • Compact Implementation Of 8th Order FIR Filter • Fast Implementation of 2nd
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note AVR040: EMC Design Considerations Scope
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 1619C–AVR–01/04 AVR040: EMC Design Considerations Scope This application note covers the most common EMC problems designers encounter when using microcontrollers. It will briefly discuss the various phenomena. The refer- ence literature covers EMC design i
8-bit RISC Microcontroller Application Note
8-bit RISC Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 2508B–AVR–01/04 AVR182: Zero Cross Detector Features • Interrupt Driven • Modular C Source Code • Size Efficient Code • Accurate and Fast Detection • A Minimum of External Components Introduction One of the many issues with developing modern applicati
AVR242: 8-bit Microcontroller Multiplexing LED Drive anda4x4Keypad Multiplexing Features reduced to fifteen with a bit of ingenuity,
AVR242: 8-bit Microcontroller Multiplexing LED Drive anda4x4Keypad Multiplexing Features reduced to fifteen with a bit of ingenuity, allowing the smaller 20-pin AVR to be LED Drive and a • 16 Key Pushbutton Pad in4x4Matrix • 4 Digit Multiplexed LED Display with used. The circuit diagram is shown in
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note AVR180: External Brown-out Protection
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 1051B–AVR–05/02 AVR180: External Brown-out Protection Features • Low-voltage Detector • Prevent Register and EEPROM Corruption • Two Discrete Solutions • Integrated IC Solution • Extreme Low-cost Solution • Extreme Low-power Solution • Formulas for Compone
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 1259D–AVR–04/05 AVR134: Real Time Clock (RTC) using the Asynchronous Timer Features • Real Time Clock with Very Low Power Consumption (4 µA @ 3.3V) • Very Low Cost Solution • Adjustable Prescaler to Adjust Precision • Counts Time, Date, Month, and Year wit
  Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram Samsung Electronics 6-1
8-bit Microcntroller Application Note
8-bit Microcntroller Application Note Rev. 2532A–AVR–01/03 AVR243: Matrix Keyboard Decoder Features • 64-key Push-button Keyboard in8x8Matrix • No External Components Required • Wakes Up from Sleep Mode on Keypress • Easily Implemented into Other Applications • Low Power Consumption • Software Conta
  Alignment and Adjustments
Alignment and Adjustments 1. Tuner FM THD Adjustment FMOutput Antenna GND SETSSG FREQ. 98 MHz Terminal Oscilloscope Adjustment FM S.S.G Input point FM DETECTOR COIL Speaker (FM DET) Terminal output Input Output 60 dB Distortion Meter Minumum Distortion (0.4% below) (Figure 1-1) Figure1-1 IF CENTER
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 2540A–AVR–07/03 AVR104: Buffered Interrupt Controlled EEPROM Writes Features • Flexible Multi-byte EEPROM Buffer • Power Efficient EEPROM Access • Access Control on Buffers • EEPROM Buffer Rewrite Introduction Many applications use the built-in EEPROM of t
  Schematic Diagram - This Document can not be used without Samsung’s authorization -
Schematic Diagram - This Document can not be used without Samsung’s authorization - 7-1 MAIN 7-1 Samsung Electronics 7-2 FRONT - This Document can not be used without Samsung’s authorization - Samsung Electronics 7-2 7-3 DSP - This Document can not be used without Samsung’s authorization - 7-3 Sam
  TroubleShooting
TroubleShooting 9-1 Main 9-1 Samsung Electronics Samsung Electronics 9-2 9-3 Samsung Electronics Samsung Electronics 9-4 9-2 DVD Servo parts 9-5 Samsung Electronics Samsung Electronics 9-6 9-7 Samsung Electronics Samsung Electronics 9-8 9-9 Samsung Electronics Samsung Electronics 9-10 9-11 Samsung
AVR054: Run-time calibration of the internal RC oscillator
AVR054: Run-time calibration of the internal RC oscillator Features • Calibration of internal RC oscillator via UART • LIN 2.0 compatible synchronization/calibration to within +/-2% of target frequency • Alternate run-time synchronization/calibration to within +/-1% of target frequency • Support for
SERVICE Manual
DVD RECEIVER AMP HT-DB120 SERVICE Manual DVD RECEIVER AMP SYSTEM CONTENTS 1. Alignment and Adjustments 2. Exploded Views and Parts List 3. Electrical Parts List 4. Block Diagrams 5. PCB Diagrams 6. Wiring Diagram 7. Schematic Diagrams 8. IC block Diagrams 9.Troubleshooting - Confidential - ELECTRONI
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note AVR131: Using the AVR’s High-speed PWM
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 2542A–AVR–09/03 AVR131: Using the AVR’s High-speed PWM Features • Analog Waveform Generation using PWM • High-speed Prescalable PWM Clock Introduction This application note is an introduction to the use of the high-speed Pulse Width Mod- ulator (PWM) avail
8-bit RISC Microcontroller Application Note AVR042: AVR® Hardware Design Considerations
8-bit RISC Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 2521B–AVR–01/04 AVR042: AVR® Hardware Design Considerations Features • Providing Robust Supply Voltage, Digital and Analog • Connecting the RESET Line • SPI Interface for In-System Programming • Using External Crystal or Ceramic Resonator Oscillators
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note AVR240: 4x4Keypad – Wake-up on Keypress Features Introduction
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note AVR240: 4x4Keypad – Wake-up on Keypress Features • 16 Key Pushbutton Pad in4x4Matrix • Very Low Power Consumption • AVR in Sleep Mode and Wakes Up on Keypress • Minimum External Components • ESD Protection Included if Necessary • Efficient Code • Complete Progr
Microcontrollers for Fluorescent and High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts SMARTER, MORE FLEXIBLE LIGHTING SOLUTIONS
LIGHTINGMICROCONTROLLERSMicrocontrollers for Fluorescent and High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts SMARTER, MORE FLEXIBLE LIGHTING SOLUTIONS Developed together with the industry leading lamp ballast manufac- turers, Atmel® microcontrollers are optimized for Linear and Dimmable Fluorescent tubes, as
AVR121: Enhancing ADC resolution by oversampling
AVR121: Enhancing ADC resolution by oversampling Features • Increasing the resolution by oversampling • Averaging and decimation • Noise reduction by averaging samples 1 Introduction Atmel’s AVR controller offers an Analog to Digital Converter with 10-bit resolution. In most cases 10-bit resolution